Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

543
  SAP AG 2009 IUT110 Introduction to the SAP Utilities System THE BEST RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP © SAP AG 2009 IUT110 Introductio n to the S AP Ut ilities System   ERP2005 SAP for Utilities ECC 6.0  Version 94  Material number: 50099965

Transcript of Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 1/541

 

SAP AG 2009

IUT110 Introduction to the SAP Utilities System

THE BEST RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP

© SAP AG 2009

IUT110

Introduction to the SAP Utilities System

 

  ERP2005 SAP for Utilities ECC 6.0

  Version 94

  Material number: 50099965

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 2/541

 

SAP AG 2009

Copyright 2009 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted inany form or for any purpose without the express permission ofSAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

Copyright

 

  Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

  Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

  IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400,

OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere,

 Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

  Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.

  UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

  Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

  HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide

Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

  Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

  JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology

invented and implemented by Netscape.

  MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden.

  SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, and other SAP products and services mentioned

herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in

Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names

mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves

informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.

  These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and

its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation orwarranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the

materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in

the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein

should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 3/541

 

SAP AG 2009

Prerequisites

Basic knowledge of the SAP system(SAP01 SAP Overview)

Knowledge and experienceof the business processesin a utility company

Knowledge and experience of the Windows operating system environment

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 4/541

 

SAP AG 2009

Target Group

Participants

Decision makers who use SAP Utilities to support theirbusiness processes

Project managers responsible for implementingSAP Utilities

A project team implementing business processeswith SAP Utilities

Administrators who optimize processesin the SAP Utilities environment

Consultants preparing to

implement SAP Utilities

Duration

5 days

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 5/541

 

SAP AG 2009

Course Objectives

This course will teach you:

The concept of integratingSAP Utilities in SAP ERP

About the business processes in the utilitiesindustry

How to use SAP Utilities in SAP ERP andimplement it efficiently

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 6/541

 

SAP AG 2008

Objectives

After completing this course, you will be able to:

Describe how SAP Utilities is integrated in theSAP ERP environment

Perform the core business processes

Explain the structure and function ofprocesses

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 7/541

 

SAP AG 2009

Table of Contents

Preface

Unit 8 Billing Master Data

Unit 9 Billing and Invoicing

Unit 10 Energy Data Management

Unit 11 Real-Time Pricing

Unit 12 Budget Billing Plan

Unit 13 Contract Accounting

Unit 1 Overview

Unit 2 IC and Master Data

Unit 3 Move-In/Out

Unit 4 Work Management

Unit 5 Device Technology

Unit 6 Device Installation

Unit 7 Meter Reading

 

  IC: Customer Interaction Center

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 8/541

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 9/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 10/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-2

SAP AG 2009

Overview: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the integration of SAP Utilities in SAPERP 6.0

Name the most important SAP ERP componentsand their roles in the utilities industry

Describe the functions of SAP Utilities

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 11/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-3

SAP AG 2009

Overview: Business Scenario

The course participants are new employees ofENRG AG

 You are taking part in a 5-day training program

 Your main tasks are customer-orientedprocesses in the customer center and customercare for corporate customers

Using standard business processes, you willlearn about the structure of SAP Utilities and howit operates

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 12/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 13/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-5

SAP AG 2009

SAP ERP Architecture

   T  e  c   h  n  o   l  o

  g  y

   A  p  p   l   i  c

  a   t   i  o  n

Self-Service Procurement

Strategic Enterprise Management

Internet Sales

Self Services

... and more

Additional components

   C  o  m  p  o  s   i   t  e   A  p  p   l   i  c  a   t   i  o  n   F  r  a  m  e  w  o  r   k

APPLICATION PLATFORM

L i  f   e C  y cl   eM an a g em en t  

PEOPLE INTEGRATION

Multi Channel Access

Portal Collaboration

INFORMATION INTEGRATION

Master Data Management

Knowledge Manag.

PROCESS INTEGRATIONIntegrationBroker 

BusinessProcess Management

J2EE ABAP

DB and OS Abstraction

SAP WebApplication Server 

SAP R/3 Enterprise

SAP R/3Enterprise 1.0 IS-U 4.71

SAP Basis

SAP R/3up to 4.6C

< IS-U 4.64

   C  o  m  p  o  s   i   t  e   A  p  p   l   i  c  a   t   i  o  n   F  r  a  m  e  w  o  r   k

APPLICATION PLATFORM

L i  f   e C  y cl   eM an a g em en t  

Composite Applications

PEOPLE INTEGRATION

Multi Channel Access

Portal Collaboration

INFORMATION INTEGRATION

Master Data Management

Knowledge Manag.

PROCESS INTEGRATIONIntegrationBroker 

BusinessProcess Management

J2EE ABAP

DB and OS Abstraction

SAP ERP 6.0

Strategic Enterprise Management

Self Services

Additional componentsSelf-Service Procurement

Internet Sales

... and more

Strategic Enterprise Management

Business Intelligence

SAP R/3 Enterprise 2.0IS-U 4.72

Business Intelligence

SAP NetWeaver™ SAP NetWeaver™ 7.0

 

  SAP ERP is the next step in this development. The figure shows the elements that are contained in

SAP ERP.

  In SAP NetWeaver you can see the elements that are technically integrated into SAP ERP (for

example, Business Intelligence).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 14/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-6

SAP AG 2008

SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver 

SAP ERPAnalyticsFinancials

Human Capital ManagementOperations

Corporate Services

SAP NetWeaver ™

Some examples of functions that useNetWeaver technology

   C  o  m  p  o  s   i   t  e

   A  p  p   l   i  c  a   t   i  o  n   F  r  a  m  e  w  o  r   k

L i  f   e C  y cl   eM an a g

 em en t  

PROCESS INTEGRATION

IntegrationBroker 

BusinessProcess Management

INFORMATION INTEGRATION

Business Intelligence

Master Data Management

Knowledge Manag.

PEOPLE INTEGRATION

Multi Channel Access

Portal Collaboration

APPLICATION PLATFORM

J2EE

DB and OS Abstraction

ABAP

SAP ERP is the successor to SAP R/3.

SAP ERP contains the full scope offunctions of SAP R/3 Enterprise. A large number of additional business

processes Integrated and personalized functions

SAP ERP is based on SAP NetWeaver.

… Financial Supply Chain Management,

Self Service Procurement …

… Strategic Enterprise Management,Manager Self Services …

… Self services, shared folders and jointprojects ...

…Self Services,Adobe Print Forms …

 

  SAP ERP is based on SAP NetWeaver.

  This slide shows a number of examples. Many self-services are delivered along with SAP ERP.

  Other functions such as self-service procurement use the Integration Broker (SAP Exchange

Infrastructure).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 15/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-7

SAP AG 2009

SAP ERP and SAP Utilities

SAP Switch Framework

SAP Discrete Industries

Mill Products

SAP Utilities

SAP Telecommunications

SAP Oil and Gas

…..

SAP ECCSAP ERP CentralComponent 6.0

Industry BusinessFunction Sets

Generic BusinessFunctions

Financial Services

Global Trade

…..

 

….. 

Multiple genericbusiness functionscan be activated

Core

Extension

Only one industry canbe activated usingBusiness FunctionSets

  SAP Business Suite is industry-independent. However, many industries require special functions

and processes. To fulfill these requirements, SAP provides industry-specific solutions.

  These industry solutions result partly from working closely with strategic development partners.

Industry-specific functions are developed for these solutions and the solutions are offered as SAP

solutions.

  The industries are activated using the SAP Switch Framework and the corresponding Business

Function Sets.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 16/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-8

SAP AG 2009

SAP Business Suite

SAP SCM

SAP PLM

SAP SRM SAP CRMSAP ERP 6.0

SAP for Utilities

Lifecycle Data Management, Project Management,Quality Management and

Asset Management

Inventory and Facilities ManagementProduction and Shipment

   S  a   l  e  s   O  r   d  e  r

   M  a  n  a  g  e  m  e  n   t

   C  o  n   t  r  a  c   t   M  a  n  a  g  e  m  e  n   t

P  ur  ch  a s e

R e q ui   si   t  i   on

SAP NetWeaver 

SAP Business Suite

 

  SAP ERP is a solution in SAP Business Suite. It is based on the requests and requirements of

customers and user groups as well as on information from analysts and leading experts. This is to

ensure that the challenges that current and future customers have to face in the marketplace are

always met.

  The core functions and solutions from SAP ERP are extended and enhanced by the following

solutions of SAP Business Suite:

•  SAP Customer Relationship Management

-  SAP CRM is a solution that puts the customer first. The customer can use a variety of

channels to contact the company.

  SAP Product Lifecycle Management-  This solution provides functions for product development, product safety, quality assurance,

and plant maintenance.

•  SAP Supply Chain Management

-  The supply chain does not end at the warehouse door. You can use SAP SCM to plan and

optimize supply chains across the entire company.

•  SAP Supplier Relationship Management

-  Buying on the Internet or on the marketplace is just one possibility for optimizing

 procurement. Employees can use this solution to notify the purchasing department of their

requirements quickly and effectively.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 17/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-9

SAP AG 2009

SAP Business Suite Integration

SAP Business Suite

SAP ERP

Customer 

SAP CRM

SAP BCM SAP CRMInteraction

Center 

SAP BI /Analytics

Marketing

Sales andDistribution

Service

Accounting

Logistics

Inbo

und

Cont

act

Cent

ers

Pers

onal

Tele

phon

y

Mobil

e

Cont

act

Cent

ers

and

Telep

hony

Outb

ound

Cont

act

Cent

ers

Unified Contact Routing

IVR and Voicemail Services

Online Monitoring, Reporting and Analysis

Centralized Management and Administration

Directoryand PresenceServices

Voice Logging

CorporateCommunication Services

   S  o   l  u   t   i  o  n

   C  a  p  a   b   i   l   i   t   i  e  s

Channels Interaction and Communication

 

  SAP CRM Interaction Center is an integral component of SAP CRM.

  SAP Business Communication Management (BCM) is a multi-channel platform for

 bi-directional contact.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 18/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-10

SAP AG 2009

Developing Customer Interaction

Front Office• 1998• IS-U/CCS 1.2

L Shape CIC• 2000• IS-U/CCS 4.61

IC WinClient• 2002• CRM 3.0

• IS-U/CCS 4.71

IC WebClient• since 2004• SAP CRM 2007• SAP ERP 6.0

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 19/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-11

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities is ...

COMPREHENSIVE

Business processesfor the utilities industryFor residential,

commercial andindustrial customersNumerous

communicationchannels: Telephone, e-mail,

interactive forms, Internet self-services, voice self-services, Webshop, meter, …

FLEXIBLE

Individual processes canbe included andintegrated easily in theexisting landscapeSeamless integration of

services

SIMPLE

Intuitive Web-baseduser interfaceRole-based profilesSimple adjustment by

configuration

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 20/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-12

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities Strong Points

Supports deregulation scenarios

Integration of application areas

Flexibility

Customer orientation

Open architecture

Homogenous interaction between accounting and core logisticsprocesses

Business processes across all areas

Shorter lead times for business processes

Can be adapted to local deregulation rules

Can be implemented in every type of company

Supports all types of service

Enables development of an individual business strategy

User-friendly Business process-oriented

Competition-oriented

Informative

Communicative

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 21/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-13

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities and Business Intelligence (BI)

ERP Other 

Efficient Analysis of Information

- Innovative and intuitive user interface- Efficient OLAP analysis functions

- For all types of user 

Extensive Business Content

- Information models, reports andextractors

- Metadata repository

- Company comparison values

End-to-End Data Warehousing Solutions

- Extraction of SAP ERP data and external data

- Fully automated

- Central control

 

  SAP Business Intelligence (SAP BI) is the SAP business component that is used to extract and

analyze data from operative business applications (OLTP systems). In addition to OLTP systems

such as ERP and SAP BBP (Business-to-Business Procurement: E-commerce business process used

 by employees to purchase goods and services directly from other suppliers), other external data

sources such as databases or online services can also be integrated. OLTP stands for online

transaction processing.

  SAP Business Intelligence supports online analytical processing (OLAP) and is designed to process

large volumes of operational and historical data.

  SAP BI contains all of the metadata required for common business processes. This includes

InfoSources, InfoObjects, InfoCubes, and standard reports, transfer structures for all releases, and

communication structures and update rules for each InfoCube. These elements are part of a "ready-to-go" strategy that supports automatic data transfer with immediate analysis once the system has

 been installed and the source system defined.

  SAP BI requests application data at regular intervals from the assigned source systems (pull-

mechanism). For this reason the backend systems contain extractors that collect data and deliver it to

SAP Business Intelligence.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 22/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-14

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities Deregulation

Provides

the supply grid andaccompanyingservices

Creates

utility contract,bill, makes collections

Electronic Data

Exchange

Distributor Supplier  

Customer/point of delivery

Consumption values, gridusage bills, customer data,

and technical data

Customer change, changesto customer data, grid usagepayment, service requests

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 23/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-15

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities Customer E-Services

SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0UCES 6.02

Generalcontact

Contacthistory

Rate comparison

Interimbill

Anonymousmeter reading

entry

UCES 6.0

ChangeBB plan

DisplayBB plan

Contractdetails

Meter readinghistory

Consumptionhistory

Meter reading dates

User creation

Passwordchange

FAQ

Documentationof 

user activities

Enter meter readings

Credit memooverview

Credit memoclearing

E-mailnotification

Complaint

IS-U/CCS 4.64

IS-U/CCS 4.72 (4.64 downgrade as project solution)

SAP ERP 6.0 (4.64 downgrade as project solution)

Confirmation

Credit carddata

maintenance

Bank datamaintenance

Master datachange

Move-in/out

Direct debitmandate

Partialpayment

Paymentdetails

Meter over-view

Move-out

Billpayment

Billdisplay

Overviewof paid

invoices

Overviewof openinvoices

Move-in

UCES = SAP Utilities Customer E-Services 6.02

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 24/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-16

SAP AG 2009

SAP Service Marketplace

 

SAP ERPhttp://service.sap.com/erp

 

SAP NetWeaver 

http://service.sap.com/netweaver 

 

Development News

http://service.sap.com/developmentnews

 

SAP for Utilities

http://service.sap.com/Utilities

 

New Release Strategy

http://service.sap.com/releasestrategy

 

Release Notes

http://service.sap.com/releasenotes

 

Upgrade Information Center http://service.sap.com/upgrade-erp

 

Online Helphttp://help.sap.com

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 25/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 1-17

SAP AG 2009

Overview: Summary

SAP Utilities supports all the customer-oriented

core business processes of utility, wastedisposal, and service companies.

SAP Utilities is an integral part of the SAP ERPcomponent.

SAP Utilities is designed for billing andmanaging standard divisions as well as foroffering additional new services.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 26/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 27/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-1

SAP AG 2009

IC and Master Data

Contents:

Interaction Center Objectives

Deploying and Working with the Interaction Center 

Interaction Center Processing Steps

Interaction Center Application Areas

Master Data

Customer Contacts and Interaction Records

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 28/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 29/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 30/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-4

SAP AG 2009

IC Process Billing Correction

Simulate

bill or 

process

rebill

Correct

the Meter 

Reading

Result

Select

and display

Print

Document

Execute

Billing

Correction

Process

Identifycustomer inInteractioncenter 

 

  To process the billing correction directly, the agent can chose between two options:

•  Process Full Reversal – the original bill is fully reversed and the rebill is processed as new

•  Process Adjustment Reversal – the net difference between the original and new bills is sent to the

customer

  The agent can directly enter the new reading results or can utilize standard estimation functionality

to obtain an estimated result

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 31/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-5

SAP AG 2009

IC Process Create Installment Plan

SaveInstallment

Plan

Accept or adjustproposedplandetails

Select

and display

Open Itemsfor Account

Execute

CreateInstallment

Plan

Process

Identifycustomer inInteractioncenter 

 

  To create the installment plan, the agent can chose between two procedures:

•  Enter the installment amount

-  The installment amount is determined from the sum of original items and the installment

amount

•  Enter the rounding amount and the number of installments

-  The installment amount is determined from the sum of the original receivables, the rounding

amount, and the number of installments

  The system uses the parameters to create an installment plan proposal

  The agent can still make changes to the proposed installment plan (such as add/delete installments,

calculate interest, create fees for the creation of the installment plan).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 32/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-6

SAP AG 2009

IC Process Customer Overview

Business Partner 

Contract Account

Account Balance

Budget Billing Amounts

Invoices

Historical Consumption Values

Contract Overview

and much more

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 33/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-7

SAP AG 2009

Requirements for IC

Efficient user interface

Short training period

All normal business processes must be preconfigured andaccessed directly

Entry with incomplete data and comprehensive search help

User-specific modifications to the interfaceand the available business processes

Connection to communication management systems

(SAP BCM)

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 34/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-8

SAP AG 2009

IC WebClient Layout

Scratchpad

Alerts

Systemmessages

Navigationbar 

Toolbar 

Broadcastmessages

Sandra Turner 

Hello,I have problems with the XY-Interface of mynotebook HT-1010.Sandra Turner 

[email protected]

Sandra Turner, Denver, Colorado

Solution Check ZP-Installation file

Customer 

e-mail In: Notebook: Problem

e-mail Out: Notebook: Solution

Service Service Order 

 Activ ity Cl ipboard

Interaction Record 5009874

Work

space

Follow-up and Actions

Last Interactions

Communicationinformation

Account

info

Status

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 35/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-9

SAP AG 2009

IC Inbox and Connection to SAP BCM

e-mail, fax, letters(scanned documents)

...

Workflow

System

Business Partner 

Work item in inbox for e-

mail, fax, letters ...

Confirmation

Call Center Agent

 E x e c u t e s

Displays customer data ininteraction center 

 

  Business Communication Management (BCM) is complementary software which provides a flexible

multi-channel all-IP business communications platform. It enables telephony integration, supports

chat, e-mail, voice and SMS.

  An all-IP, browser-based solution which is designed to work with SAP CRM out of the box.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 36/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-10

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities Data Model – House

Basement

Apartment 2

Apartment 3

Apartment 1= PremiseEntranceHall

Service connection electricityService connection gasService connection water 

Supplygrid

Street

Connection Object

Device loc.:Basement

Device loc.:Corridor 

Businesspartner 

Contract 1:Electricity

Contract 2:Gas

Contract 3:Water 

Utilityinstallation 1:

Electric meter 

Utilityinstallation 2:Gas meter 

Utility

installation 3:Water meter 

Contractaccount

 

  Relations:

•  1 Business Partner : n Contract Accounts

•  1 Contract Account : n Contracts

•  1 Contract : 1 Installation (time-dependent)

•  1 Connection Object : n Premises

•  1 Connection Object : n Device Locations

•  1 Premise : n Installations

•  Device relations depend on scenario

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 37/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-11

SAP AG 2009

SAPBusiness partner 

Owners

Prospect

Tenants

Customer Debitors

Employee

Installer 

Individuals and companies Business partner relationships Flexible interfaces Integration of business roles

GroupsCommercial and industrial customer 

Various Business Partners

 

  The SAP Utilities Industry solution is flexible enough to support all types of business partners.

  The Business Partner concept is used in many functional areas of the solution:

•  Employees in HR

•  Installers in PM

•  Prospects in CRM and Marketing

  The same entity can be represented only once in the system, regardless of the application areas

which use it for processing.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 38/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 39/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-13

SAP AG 2009

Data for all roles Data for specific roles

General

• Form of address, name• Legal form, company• Group, search terms

Addresses

• Standard address• P.O. box address• Other addresses

Communication

• Telephone, fax• Extension• Internet, e-mail, online

SAPBusinesspartner 

SAPBusinesspartner 

Business Partner Data

Payment transactions

• Bank details

Additional data• Status• Identification numbers• Legitimization• Register entry

BP Relationships• Hierarchical

• Equal• Connected

Biller Direct

 

  Business partners are divided into various groups, to which different attributes are allocated.

SAP Utilities differentiates between:

•  Individuals

•  Organizations

•  Groups

  Depending on the business context, the business partner can assume different roles.

SAP Utilities differentiates between:

•  Contract partner

•  Installer

•  Contact person

•  Prospect

Other roles depend on Customizing

  A sales and distribution (SD) business partner is created in the background for each contract partner.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 40/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-14

SAP AG 2003

General data Dunning/payment data

Contract

account

Dunning data

Dunning control Dunning letter recipient Dunning block reason

Outgoing payments

Payment method

Bank details  Alternate payeeAccount assignment

Where-used list for Ols Planning group  Account determination Clearing category

Incoming payments

Payment method Bank details  Alternate payer 

Control

 Alternative bill recipient Paid by collective bill

account  Additional bill

General data  Account name  Account no. in legacy

system Terms of payment Tolerance group

Contract Account Data

Biller Direct

 

  A contract account groups together all of a business partner's contracts that have the same payment

and dunning data. Contracts that are created with the business partner are allocated to the contract

account. As a result, any number of contracts can be allocated to a contract account.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 41/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-15

SAP AG 2009

Contractpartner 

Contractpartner 

150.--

100.--

300.--

100.--

50.--

Collectivebill

Collectivebill

Total : 450.--

(Statisticalposting tocontractcollective billingaccount CBA 1)

Total : 450.--

(Statisticalposting tocontractcollective billingaccount CBA 1)

BillCA 1

Total : 250.--

BillCA 2

Total : 400.--

BillCA 3

Total : 50.--

Contractaccount

collectivebill

Contractaccount

collectivebill

Collective Bills

Optional

Contractaccount 1

Contractaccount 2

Contractaccount 3

Contract 1(Elec. - domestic)

Contract 2(Water - domestic)

Contract 3(Gas - business)

Contract 4(Elec. - business)

Contract 5(Elec. - business)

 

  The collective bill account is a contract account that is created in the business master data of the

utilities industry and is marked as a collective bill account. Several contract accounts can refer to

the same collective bill account.

  The collective bill account groups together items that are posted to the individual accounts and that

refer to the collective bill account under one or more collective bills. Only items with the same due

date and origin can be grouped together in a collective bill.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 42/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-16

SAP AG 2006

General Contract Data

Data Relevant to Budget Billing

• Budget billing adjustment

• Budget billing cycle

Account assignment data

• Account determination ID

• Cost center • Business area

• Contract account

• Division

• Company code• Individual/operation consumption

• Statistics group

• Authorization groups

Move-in/Move-out data

• Contract start/end date

• Renewal dates

• Cancellation dates

• Joint invoice

• Billing Blocking Reason

• Outsorting group

Data Relevant to Billing

Deregulation data

• Service Provider 

• Service provider

invoicing

• External contract number 

• Payment class

Sales data

• Sales partner 

•Representative

• Sales document• Installation

• Move-in date

• Move-out date Contract(Billableservice)

Contract(Billableservice)

Contract Data

Scheduling data

 

  In the field 'Statistics Group', you specify the statistics group for a contract. This is used for

determining data for sales statistics.

  The Authorization Group prevents unauthorized access to specific objects. To be able to carry out

any activity protected in this way, the user must have authorization for both the activity and the

authorization group.

  If you maintain data relevant to budget billing (for example the budget billing cycle) in the

contract, the data you enter overrides the default values defined in the portion or in the Customizing

settings.

  The outsorting group determines which validations are to be carried out in billing. A contract can

also be outsorted manually. 

  The meter reading block reason specifies why the contract has been blocked for meter readings. If

you make an entry in this field, the contract can no longer be billed. The contract will not be released

again for billing until you enter a billing release reason (the billing release reason overrides the

 billing block reason).

  A billing area is an organizational unit that covers a restricted area of activity/responsibility in your

company. Value movements entered in Financial Accounting can be attributed to this business area

for the purposes of external accounting.

  Schedule data is provided mainly for information purposes. It allows you to display information on

when a contract was signed or cancelled, for example.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 43/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-17

SAP AG 2008

Connection Object Data

PM Data Data Specific to SAP Utilities

ConnectionObject

Other Data

• Structure/equipment list• Account determ

Plant Maintenance

• Structure• Planning plant• Planner group

Location Data

• Maintenance plant• Location description• ABC indicator 

General

• Text• Processing status• Notes

Properties

• Regional structure group• Authorization group

Address

• Street, house number • Postal code, city• Political ?regional structure

 

  A connection object is normally a building. However, it can be a plot of land or other structure such

as a fountain or a building site. The connection object corresponds to the functional location in the

 Plant Maintenance (PM) component and has the same key.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 44/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-18

SAP AG 2009

General data Relationships

Premise

Additional data

Notes Update log

Location data

Floor  Room number  Location description

Connection object

Forms the link betweenthe premise and theregional structure

Premise Data

Attributes

Premise type Owners Number of occupants

Installation

Can comprise severalinstallations to be billed

Technical

Can be assigned to adevice location

 

  The premise is a spatially enclosed unit (such as an apartment, factory floor) that has to be supplied.

  The premise is allocated to a connection object.

  Owner attribute enables Landlord Automatic Turn on/Move-in process.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 45/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-19

SAP AG 2009

General Data Relationships

Other Data Installation type Guarantee of supply Notes Change log

Control Data

Supply or consumption Definition of base period Meter reading control

Process Data

Current premise Current business partner  Current contract

Installation

Billing

Rate category Rate data for device and

registers Reference value

Regional Structure Linked via the premise and

connection object Overriding of default meter 

reading unit

Business Partner 

Linked to the conclusion of contract with thebusiness partner 

Installation Data

 

  The installation is the most important technical master data object in SAP Utilities.

  The installation contains the important control data for meter reading and billing.

  The installation groups together division-specific devices, registers and, where applicable, reference

values that are allocated to a premise and, as a result, are billed jointly.

  The installation is allocated to a specific contract. Only in exceptional cases is it not allocated to a

contract (for example, the installation is under construction, there is no owner for the installation).

  The installation contains the meter reading unit with the scheduling data.

  The installation contains the rate category with the billing rule data.

  The installation contains information about the service (for example, grid usage or supply).

  The installation references the point of delivery.

  The installation references the synthetic load profile for SLP customers ( Load Profile button).

  The installation references the installation structure ( Devices button).

  The installation references the meter reading, billing, and print documents ( Billing View button).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 46/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-20

SAP AG 2009

Point of Delivery Data

Point ofDelivery

Technical

• Register 

• Structure category• History

Point of Delivery ID

Deregulation

• Installation

• Premise• Service type• Grid (grid operator)• Settlement unit

Header Data

• Description• Point of delivery type• Point of delivery role

 

  The point of delivery is the point to which a utility service is supplied for a customer.

  The point of delivery is identified by a unique key, the point of delivery ID. This is used for

communicating with external systems. The unique ID ensures that registered data and information

about a utility service that is rendered at a point of delivery is not incorrectly allocated, even when a

customer switches his or her utility company.

  The deregulation point of delivery is used to communicate between different utility companies in a

deregulated energy market.

An example of this could be the exchange of consumption information between a distributor and a

supplier.

  The technical point of delivery is used to communicate with a remote meter reading system.

This type of communication is used in the Energy Data Management  (EDM) componentfor importing profile values.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 47/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-21

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities Data Model

IS-U

FI-CA

SD CS PM

Cross-Appl.ContractAccount

BusinessPartner 

RegionalStructure

Connect ion 

Object 

Connection

DeviceLocation

Premise

Contract(Supply)

Installation

Device

MeterReading

Integrationwith Logistics

DeviceCategory

PoD

Service

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 48/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-22

SAP AG 2009

SAP Utilities and SAP CRM Data Model

IBASE

ConnectionObjectInstallation

Contract

PoD

ContractAccount Bill

Billing

BusinessPartner 

Contract

Account

BusinessAgreement

ConnectionObject

SAP ERP / SAP Utilities SAP CRM

PoD& PremisePremise

ProfileProfile

 

  The mapping of master data objects is displayed here based on the data models of both systems.

•  1:1 - Mapping of the business partner and the contract accounts

•  Parts of the SAP IS-U contract and the installation together represent the utility contract in SAP

CRM.

•  The technical data is mapped in a leaner hierarchy in SAP CRM. This means that only the

connection object and the points of delivery beneath it exist in the SAP CRM system. The point

of delivery in SAP CRM also contains data from the SAP IS-U premise (for example, the floor).

•  The billing and invoicing data is only known in SAP IS-U.

•  Profiles in CRM: Historical profile, forecast profile, and schedule profile

•  IS-U customer contacts are replicated to CRM interaction records.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 49/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-23

SAP AG 2009

SAP for UtilitiesSAP CRM

Contract Management with SAP CRM and SAP ERP

CRM Contract

SAP for Utilities

Master DataGenerator 

SAP UtilitiesMaster DataTemplate

Configuration

Point of DeliverySwitch

Document

1 Beginning ofMarket

Communication

SAP CRMProduct

Configuration

2

Status

3

4

 

  (1) The contract is created in CRM – by allocating a product to a service location (IBASE) and

customer (account).

  (3) The replication process creates the necessary objects in the backend IS-U system. The product

allocates to an MDT configuration which controls the replication.

  (2) If IDE is required, then the market communication is also triggered by the CRM contact creation.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 50/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-24

SAP AG 2009

Fax Letter Telephone Internet

 WWW 

In person

UtilityCompany

UtilityCompany

 WWW 

Recording of contacts resulting from:

Personal customer service, telephone calls

Correspondence, fax, Internet, e-mail

Evaluation of contacts for:

Comprehensive overview of customer service

Quality and efficiency of consulting processes

Contact Management in Customer Service

 

  Customer contact management in SAP Utilities is designed to record all types of customer contact

 between the utilities company and the customer.

  Customer contacts can be classified during creation according to class, type and the corresponding

activity.

  Interaction records can be automatically saved during customer interaction process.

  Business transaction details can be attached to interactions.

  IS-U Customer contacts are replicated into CRM Interaction Records providing IC users with a full

 picture of all customer interactions.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 51/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-25

SAP AG 2008

Customer Contact Data

Customer Contact

General

Business partner  Contact partner  Contact number 

Process Description

Date, time Contact class Contact activity

Communication

In person, telephone, fax,Internet, mail, online

Incoming, outgoing

References

Reference to anybusiness objects

Permissibilities can be set

Notes

User-defined text Indicator for additional

documents

Other Data User-defined fields

for example, division,company code

 Authorization group

 

  Contact classes and activities can be created according to the requirements of the utility company.

  Contact classes are used to group customer contacts according to their general subject area.

Example: Information, billing, budget billing amount, ...

  The contact activity describes the type of activity between the business partner and the utility

company.

  Example: Rate information, account information, ...

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 52/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-26

SAP AG 2009

IC and Master Data: Summary

The Interaction Center is designed to deal withinformation-based and operational processes.

The processing interface is an efficient workenvironment that provides quick access to criticalinformation.

The openness and flexibility of the Interaction Center enable you to integrate business processes in thebest possible way.

Contact management enables you to evaluate the

complete contact history of business partners.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 53/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-27

Exercises

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Using the IC

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Describe the purpose of the IC and the areas in which it can be used

•  Use the IC to work through processes efficiently

As an employee in the customer center, you need to process customer

inquiries quickly, completely, and correctly. This increases both customer

satisfaction and efficiency at work. A sound working knowledge of the ICwill help you achieve this.

1-1 Which units make up the Interaction Center?

What are their tasks?

Unit 1: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

Unit 2: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

Unit 3: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

Unit 4: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

1-2 True or false?

1-2-1 The IC is the central point of access for agents to handle both simple and

complex business processes.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-2 The IC has flexible, powerful search functions.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-3 The IC determines the process flows.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-4 The IC automates business processes.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-5 The data finder always identifies the business partner as the result of a search.

 __________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 54/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-28

1-3 Logon with user IUT110-##  to the SAP CRM System TPZ .

The logon process is described in the Solution of th is exercise .

1-4 To which business partner is the device with serial number I SU11020##  allocated?

What is the address of the connection object?

Proceed as follows:

•  Choose the Point of Delivery by Device option within the Search

Function field.

•  Enter the device serial number in the premise search window.

•  Press Enter  to process the search criteria

Business Partner Number Address

1-5 Enter the address of the connection object in which the device is located.

Which premises are contained in the connection object from task 1-3?

Proceed as follows:

•  In the search results list, click on the arrow to expand the Connection

Object  and find all assigned premises.

• 

Premise Number Short Text

1-6 End the interaction.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 55/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-29

1-7 Identify all customers for the connection object in Pinewood Avenue 33## . Which

 business partners live in Pinewood Avenue 33## ?

Proceed as follows:

•  In the Search for Business Partner  section, enter the address data as

the search criteria.

•  You can also enter just part of the name of the street, for example,

 Pinewo*.

•  Press Enter  to process the search criteria.

Business Partner Number First and last names of business partner

Select and confirm Max Mayer and complete the following table:

Question Answer

How many contract accounts are

assigned to Mr. Mayer?

Which types of contract

does Mr. Mayer have?

Which devices are

assigned to Mr.Mayer?

1-8 Display the data environment of the premise for the contract ISU260A3## .

1-9 Display the data for the devices and complete the following table:

Information Electricity

Meter

Gas Meter

Serial number

Device category / material number

 Name of device category

Division

Disconnection status

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 56/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-30

Web Client - Exercises

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Customer Interaction Management

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Create various customer contacts

•  Evaluate and display customer contact history

By documenting all customer contacts comprehensively, you can provide

a more efficient service to your customers. The link to business objects

allows you to access the relevant information instantly.

2-1 Create a customer interaction for the following situation:

2-1-1 Customer I SU11030##  calls to report a complaint with a move-in . You record

the complaint in a customer interaction and save the interaction record.

2-2 Display the interaction history for a customer.

2-2-1 Display all customer interactions in the IC for customer ISU260A3## . Navigate

to the detailed display for the interaction record to view the attached objects.

How many, and what kind of contacts does the customer have?

Date Category Description Status

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 57/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-31

2-3 True or false?

2-3-1 All customer interactions are always created automatically.

 ______________________________________________________

2-3-2 Customer interactions are not grouped in any meaningful manner. ______________________________________________________

2-3-3 Customer interactions can only be displayed for one business partner at a time.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 58/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-32

Web Client- Exercises

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Master Data in SAP Utilities

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Explain the SAP business partner model

•  Explain the SAP Utilities master data

•  Explain the integration of SAP Utilities master data with SAP ERP

As an employee in customer services, you have been assigned to

telephone service. Some customers only want to obtain information,

others request changes to data. Your central working environment is the

IC.

3-1 Customer I SU11010##  notifies you of new bank details that are to be used for automatic

debits from his account.

•  Start from the IC.

•  Use the payment data link.

•  Perform complete process in IC.

3-1-1 Enter the selection criteria, and display the payment data view to view thecurrent bank details for the customer’s account.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

3-1-2 Click on the Create New Bank Details button, enter the new bank details, and

save your data.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 59/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-33

3-1-3 Assign the new bank details as the payment method for incoming payments.

Save your changes.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

Return to the IC.

 ______________________________________________________

3-2 Change the description for electricity account ISU11020##.

Change the description from Residential Account  to Pri vate Account 0## .

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

End the contact.

3-3 True or false?

3-3-1 Data for a business partner who is also a contract partner, installer, and contact

 person, has to be entered more than once.

 ______________________________________________________

3-3-2 The contract account can be assigned to several business partners.

 ______________________________________________________

3-3-3 The contract account is the contract partner’s customer account.

 ______________________________________________________

3-3-4 The contract contains rate data for all divisions.

 ______________________________________________________

3-4 Name three different logs that are updated when master data is created or changed.

List the changes for each log.

To do this, use contract account I SU11020## .

1. __________________________________________________________

2. __________________________________________________________

3. __________________________________________________________

3-5 True or false?

3-5-1 The connection object is always a building.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 60/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-34

3-5-2 The connection object can comprise one or more premises.

 ______________________________________________________

3-5-3 The connection object is managed as equipment in the component PM (Plant

Maintenance).

 _____________________________________________________

3-5-4 The device location is subordinate to the connection object.

 ______________________________________________________

3-5-5 Individual devices are installed in the connection object.

 ______________________________________________________

3-5-6 The premise is managed as a functional location in PM.

 ______________________________________________________

3-5-7 The installation groups together the measuring devices of a division that are

allocated to it and a premise for the purpose of joint billing.

 ______________________________________________________

3-5-8 The installation manages basic billing control parameters.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 61/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-35

Exercises

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Financial Information

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Search for and display financial information about an account in the

FCC

A customer of the company you are working for calls the interaction

center for getting some financial inquiries. You would like to give the

calling customer the information.

4-1 Identify the Account of the customer who is calling you.

The Account ID is ISU260A3## .

Get a quick financial overview of the customer.

4-1-1 How many Business Agreements and Contracts does the Business Partner have?

4-1-2 What are the amounts of all open items and due items of all involved business

agreement together?

4-1-3 Concentrate now on Business Agreement ISU260T3## .

Which amount of this Business Agreement is open?

4-1-4 What additional information could you see in the Account Balance?

4-1-5 Are there already installment plans existing for the Business Agreements?

4-1-6 End the Contact with the Customer

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 62/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-36

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 63/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-37

Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Using the IC

1-1

Unit 1: Identification bar

Task: Confirmed data in current process

Unit 2: Navigation Toolbar

Task: Transaction groupings for initiating various customer processes.

Start comprehensive business processes, such as account display, installment

 plan creation, service initiation, etc

Unit 3: Workspace

Task: All views for a viewset – provide information and links to other processes

Unit 4: Telephony toolbar

Task: Controls integration with CTI components

1-2

1-2-1 True.

The IC integrates both simple information and environment displays and

workflow processes that are used to control comprehensive business processes.

1-2-2 True.

The IC enables you to enter a variety of search criteria in order to find the data

for a business partner.

A business partner can be determined by means of the name or device number,

for example.

1-2-3 False.

The IC can be flexibly adjusted to the process flows of the user groups.True.

The IC supports the user when working through process flows.

1-2-4 True.

Since IC and workflow processes are integrated in the IC, business processes are

controlled and forwarded automatically.

1-2-5 False.

The data finder identifies the business objects you were searching for and that

 belong to a business partner.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 64/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-38

1-3 Open the CRM Interaction Center

Log on to the SAP CRM system using SAP GUI.

Do some preparation steps which will allow you to start the CRM Web UI.

System TPZ  

Client 770  User IUT110-##  

Password init  

Language EN  or DE  

In the Favorites Menu choose CRM 7.0  or use the following Link:

http://tpztdc00.wdf.sap.corp:52080/sap/crm_logon?sap-client=770 

In the following Pop-Up-Window please enter once more:

User Name IUT110-##  

Password the new password you selected above  

1-4 In the Identification section of the Work Area, within the Search Criteria view, choose

Point of Delivery by Device in the Search Function field and enter the number

I SU11020##  in the Serial Number  field. Press Enter .

The system confirms the premise in which the device is located.

It also confirms the business partner and account which are currently active at that

service location.

Both objects are now displayed in the Information Bar.

1-5 Select the premise in the navigation area on the Environment  tab page.The object is highlighted in color.

Click on the right mouse button and choose Connection Object Environment  and then

Continue.

Premise Number Short Text

ISU11020## Pinewood Avenue 20##, New York

City

1-6 Return to the IC.

Choose End .

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 65/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-39

1-7 In the identification area, search for the street in which the connection object is located.

Enter the search criteria.

Business Partner Number First Name/Last Name

ISU260A3## Max Mayer

Select Mr. Max Mayer.

The system displays the data environment for the business partner.

You can now answer the following questions:

Question Answer

How many contract accounts are

assigned to Mr. Mayer?

Mr. Mayer has three contract accounts:

ISU260A3##ISU260C3##

ISU260T3##

Which types of contract

does Mr. Mayer have?

Mr. Mayer has four utility contracts:

Electricity contract: ISU260A3##

Gas contract: ISU260 B3##

Water contract: ISU260C3##

Electricity contract: ISU260D3##

Which devices are

assigned to Mr. Mayer?

Mr. Mayer has 4 devices:

Electric meter: ISU260A3## 

Water meter: ISU260C3## 

Gas meter: ISU260B3##

Electric meter: ISU260D3## 

1-8 Click on the Overview button on the Navigation Toolbar. Then click on the Technical

 Data Environment . Find the premise for contract ISU260A3## .

From the tree structure, you can identify the following relationships:

•  Four utility installations are allocated to the tree structure:Gas, water, and two for electricity.

•  A utility contract, contract account, and business partner is allocated to each utility

installation.

•  Meters are allocated to all installations.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 66/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-40

1-9

To display a device, click on the device .

You can now answer the following questions:

Information Electricity Meter Gas Meter

Serial number ISU260A3## ISU260B3##

Device category /

material numberTD-SRA-00 TD-GA-01

 Name of device

category

Single rate meter gas meter

Division 01 Gas

Disconnection status Not disconnected Not disconnected

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 67/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-41

Web Client -Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Customer Contact Management

2-1 From the main window of the IC, enter the selection criteria for the business partner

I SU11030##  and confirm the partner.

2-1-1 Click on the I nteraction Record  view, Search in the Reason field for a reason

for the complaint and choose ‘4. Problems in Move-in /-out’. Enter some text in

the Notes section and save the interaction.  Click on End .

2-2 Identify business partner ISU260A3##.

2-2-1 Click on the Interaction Record view, look at the Interaction History at the bottom

of the page. The system displays a list of all interactions for this customer.

Click on a line to display the customer interaction details.

The following interactions exist:

Date Category Description Status

11.01.07 - Move in [Contract] Open

12.01.07 - Move in [Contract] Open

26.01.07 Complaint Dunning reminder sent Completed

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 68/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-42

2-3

2-3-1 False.

You can also enter customer contact data manually.

The system creates the IC contact automatically based on configuration settings

2-3-2 FalseInteraction records can be cateogrized and grouped using the Reason/Priority

field.

2-3-3 False.

The information system in ERP can evaluate all customer contacts according to

different criteria. Within the IC, however, interactions can only be shown per

 business partner.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 69/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-43

Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Master Data in SAP Utilities

3-1

3-1-1 Once you have identified the customer ISU11010##, click on the Payment Data

view.

In the Existing Payment Data area you can see the currently stored bank details.

3-1-2

Click on the Create New Bank Details button.

In the Bank detail s section, enter new bank details.

In the Bank Key  field, use the help to select a bank number, i.e. Chase

Manhattan - 2222222222.

In the Ctry  field, confirm US . In the Bank Account  field, enter an account number.

Save the changes.

You have now allocated new bank details to the business partner.

3-1-3 In the new line for the bank details, click on the Assignments to Business

Agreements column, where the text currently displays ‘No assignment’. Check

the box for incoming payments and click on the Save  button to assign the

 payment details to the account. Click on End .

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 70/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-44

3-2 Identify business partner ISU11020##

Click on the Overview view in the Navigation bar.

Click on the Residential Account ISU11020## in the Environment view.

At the detail screen, click on the Edit button.In the Text  field, change the value from Residential Account to Private Account ## .

Click on the Save   button to save the changes and return to the Overview Screen .

Click on End . 

3-3

3-3-1 False.

You can use the SAP business partner model to assign different roles to a

 business partner. Only role-specific data which was not entered previously has

to be added.

3-3-2 False.

The contract account settings are such that you can only enter 1 business

 partner. However, a business partner can have several contract accounts. When

you customize the contract account category, however, you can define the

contract account so that it can be allocated to several business partners.

3-3-3 True.

The contract account is the structure that allows the billing of posting data for

contracts or contract items that have the same collection/disbursement

agreements. A customer account is managed for a contract account.

3-3-4 False.

The contract is an agreement between a business partners and a utility company

that applies to a particular division. It contains control data for billing, budget

 billing plans, and accounts receivable and payable accounting.

The rate data is stored in the installation and in the installation structure.

3-4 In ERP system TNU-770

Execute transaction code CAA3 to view the contract account. Enter account number

ISU11020##The following three logs are located under the Extras  menu:

1) Creation data

2) Field changes

3) Account changes

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 71/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-45

3-5

3-5-1 False.

The connection object can also be a piece of land, fountain, or building site.

3-5-2 True.

3-5-3 False.

The connection object is at the top of the functional location hierarchy.

3-5-4 True.

Device locations are mapped as functional locations in the PM component and

the connection object is the superordinate functional location.

3-5-5 False.

Devices are installed in device locations and are thus only indirectly allocated

to the connection object.

3-5-6 False.

The premise is only used in SAP Utilities to group together installations of

different divisions.3-5-7 True.

Devices, registers, and fixed payment billing factors assigned to a premise that

are to be billed jointly are grouped together for a specific division.

A premise can have several installations.

These installations can refer to the same or different divisions.

3-5-8 True.

The billing class and rate category are allocated to the installation.

They have a considerable influence on the billing process.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 72/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-46

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 73/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-47

Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Financial Information

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Search for and display financial information about an account in the

FCC

A customer of the company you are working for calls the interaction

center for getting some financial inquiries. You would like to give the

calling customer the information.

4-1 Identify the Account of the customer who is calling you, I SU260A3## .

Get a quick financial overview of the customer.

Enter the identification number in the Account ID field and press enter to confirm/search.

Business Partner will be confirmed and also see the confirmed business partner in the

account info box:

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 74/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 75/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-49

4-1-2 Look at the Interaction History of the customer.

What was the last contact with the customer about?

Click on the Interaction Record view and then navigate to the Interaction

History Overview.

Solution:

The customer got a reminder letter.

4-1-3 What are the amounts of all open items and due items of all involved business

agreement together?

Click on the Account Balance View and view the total balance for all business

agreements in the Account Overview.

Solution:

The sum of all open and due amounts is 700.20 USD.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 76/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-50

4-1-4 Concentrate now on Business Agreement  ISU260T 3## .

Which amount of this Business Agreement is open?

Solution:

Actual open amount: 205.86 USD.

These 205.86 USD are open more than 60 days.

You get this in formation i n the Balance overview of the account balance. 

4-1-5 What additional information could you see in the Account Balance

Solution:

Last Dunni ng Notice from January 26, 2007

Dunni ng level 01

Total Amount 237.10 USD

Last Bil li ng (with navigation to archived Bil li ng)

Currently no Budget Bi ll ing  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 77/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-51

4-1-6 Are there already installment plans existing for the Business Agreements?

Click on the Installment Plan button to pull up the Installment plan overview.

Solution:

Actual ly there are no existing instal lment plans for the Business Agreement.

4-1-7 End the Contact with the Customer

Solution:

Go to the current I nteraction Record via Navigation bar.

Add a note in the Interaction Record, change the status to “completed” and

save the Interaction Record and use the End Button in the Task bar to End

the contact. 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 78/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-52

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 79/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-53

Exercises

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Using the IC

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Describe the purpose of the CIC and the areas in which it can be used

•  Use the CIC to work through processes efficiently

As an employee in the customer center, you need to process customer

inquiries quickly, completely, and correctly. This increases both customer

satisfaction and efficiency at work. A sound working knowledge of the ICwill help you achieve this.

1-1 Which three units make up the CIC?

What are their tasks?

Unit 1: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

Unit 2: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

Unit 3: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

Unit 4: _____________________________________________

Task: _____________________________________________

1-2 True or false?

1-2-1 The IC is the central point of access for agents to handle both simple andcomplex business processes.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-2 The IC has flexible, powerful search functions.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-3 The IC determines the process flows.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-4 The IC automates business processes.

 __________________________________________________

1-2-5 The data finder always identifies the business partner as the result of a search.

 __________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 80/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 81/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-55

Business Partner Number First and last names of business partner

Select Elmer Petersheim and complete the following table:

Question Answer

How many contract accounts are

assigned to Mr. Petersheim?

Which types of contract

does Mr. Petersheim have?

Which devices are

assigned to Mr. Petersheim?

1-7 Display the data environment of the premise for the contract TB010110## .

1-8 From the data environment, save the devices that belong to the premise on the clipboard.

1-9 Display the data for the devices and complete the following table:

Information Electricity

Meter

Gas Meter Water Meter

Serial number

Device category / material number

 Name of device category

Division

Current business partner

Current device location

1-10 How can you recognize that advanced search criteria have been entered in the

identification area?

 ____________________________________________________________

 ____________________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 82/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-56

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 83/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-57

Exercises

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Customer Contact Management

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Create various customer contacts

•  Evaluate and display customer contact history

By documenting all customer contacts comprehensively, you can provide

a more efficient service to your customers. The link to business objects

allows you to access the relevant information instantly.

2-1 Create a customer contact for the following situation:

2-1-1 Customer TB010110##  reports a complaint against an employee by telephone.

You record the complaint in a customer contact.

2-1-2 You provide customer TB010110##  with general information

that you describe in the customer contact by adding object links.

Insert contract TB010110##  and contract account TB010110## .

2-2 Display the contacts

2-2-1 Display all customer contacts in the IC for customer TB010110## . Check the

object list and switch to the detailed display for the object.

How many, and what kind of contacts does the customer have?

Date Class Action Type

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 84/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-58

2-2-2 Use the customer overview in the IC to display the current customer contacts for

customer TB010110## .

2-2-3 Evaluate all the customer contacts.

Display all customer contacts entered with contact class 0008 complaint .

To do this, use the information system.

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:Uti li ties I ndustry I nformation System Report Selection

Customer Service Evaluate Customer Contacts

2-3 True or false?

2-3-1 All customer contacts are always created automatically.

 ______________________________________________________

2-3-2 Customer contacts are divided into contact

classes and further sub-divided into contact activities. ______________________________________________________

2-3-3 Customer contacts can only be displayed for one business partner at a time.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 85/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 86/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-60

3-1-3 Switch from the customer overview to change mode for the contract account,

choose the private account, and enter the new bank details as the payment

method for incoming payments. Save your changes.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

Return to the IC.

3-2 Customer TB010110##  has two contract accounts.

The following exercises are based solely on his Communi ty Account 0## .

The customer notifies you of new bank details that are to be used for automatic debits

from his community account.

3-2-1 In the navigation area, on the Environment  tab page, select the contract accountfor business partner TB010110##  and choose Change Bank Data .

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

3-2-2 Enter new bank details for the business partner and save your data.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

3-2-3 Enter the new bank details as the payment method for incoming payments in the

contract account and save your data.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

3-2-4 Enter a remark in the customer contact and save your data.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

3-3 Change the contract description for electricity contract TB010130##  in the community

account .

Change the description from Electricity Contract  to Communi ty Contract 0## .

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 87/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-61

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

End the contact.

3-4 True or false?

3-4-1 Data for a business partner who is also a contract partner, installer, and contact

 person, has to be entered more than once.

 ______________________________________________________

3-4-2 The contract account can be assigned to several business partners.

 ______________________________________________________

3-4-3 The contract account is the contract partner’s customer account. ______________________________________________________

3-4-4 The contract contains rate data for all divisions.

 ______________________________________________________

3-5 Name three different logs that are updated when master data is created or changed.

List the changes for each log.

To do this, use contract TB010130## .

1. __________________________________________________________

2. __________________________________________________________

3. __________________________________________________________

3-6 True or false?

3-6-1 The connection object is always a building.

 ______________________________________________________

3-6-2 The connection object can comprise one or more premises.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 88/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 89/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-63

Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Using the IC

1-1

Unit 1: Identification

Task: Select data using flexible search criteria.

Unit 2: Navigation Area

Task: Specific information for customer inquiries.

Start comprehensive business processes using SAP Business Workflow,

amongst other things.

Unit 3: Application Area

Task: Own overview pages containing, for example, SAP Business Workflow, inbox,

CIC contact management, and much more.

Unit 4: Action Box

Task: Calls business processes.

1-2

1-2-1 True.

The IC integrates both simple information and environment displays and

workflow processes that are used to control comprehensive business processes.

1-2-2 True.

The IC enables you to enter a variety of search criteria in order to find the data

for a business partner.

A business partner can be determined by means of the name or device number,

for example.

1-2-3 False.The IC can be flexibly adjusted to the process flows of the user groups.

True.

The IC supports the user when working through process flows.

1-2-4 True.

Since IC and workflow processes are integrated in the IC, business processes are

controlled and forwarded automatically.

1-2-5 False.

The data finder identifies the business objects you were searching for and that

 belong to a business partner.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 90/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-64

1-3 Call the IC.

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service Front-Of fi ce/Customer I nteraction Center  

Customer I nteraction Center

Switch to the data finder and click on All Search Criteria  .

Go to the Technical Data  tab page.

In the Device data area, enter the number TB010110##  in the Serial Number  field.

Exit the data finder by choosing Continue.

Choose Continue twice.

The first time you choose Continue, the system searches for the data using the selection

criteria. If the system finds data that meets the search criteria, the second time you

choose Continue confirms the search criteria.

The system displays the premise in which the device is located.

It also displays all the master data for the business partner.

1-4 Select the premise in the navigation area on the Environment  tab page.

The object is highlighted in color.

Click on the right mouse button and choose Connection Object Environment  and then

Continue.

Premise Number Short Text

TB010110## Massachusetts Avenue 0##, Boston

TB010120## Massachusetts Avenue 0##, Boston

1-5 Return to the IC.

Choose End Contact .

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 91/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-65

1-6 In the identification area, search for the street in which the connection object is located.

Enter the search criteria.

Since this connection object contains more than one business partner,

all the business partners appear in the hit list.

Business Partner Number First Name/Last Name

TB010110## Elmer PetersheimTB010120## Constance Bishop

Select Mr. Elmer Petersheim.

The system displays the data environment for the business partner.

You can now answer the following questions:

Question Answer

How many contract accounts are

assigned to Mr. Petersheim?

Mr. Petersheim has two contract accounts:

Private account: TB010110##

Community account: TB010120##

Which types of contract

does Mr. Petersheim have?

Mr. Petersheim has four utility contracts:

Electricity contract: TB010110##

Gas contract: TB010180##

Water contract: TB010120##

Electricity contract: TB010130##

Which devices are

assigned to Mr. Petersheim?

Mr. Petersheim has 3 devices:

Double rate meter for electricity: TB010110## 

Water meter: TB010120#### 

Gas meter: TB010180## 

1-7 Select the premise and choose Premise Environment .

From the tree structure, you can identify the following relationships:

•  Four utility installations are allocated to the tree structure:

Gas, water, and two for electricity.

•  A utility contract, contract account, and business partner is allocated to each utility

installation.

•  One electricity installation has no devices.

This is a flat-rate installation that does not measure consumption or energy.

•  Meters are allocated to all the other installations.

1-8 You are in the environment for premise TB010110## .To save all the devices to the clipboard,

repeat the following procedure for each device:

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 92/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 93/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-67

Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Customer Contact Management

2-1

2-1-1 Call the IC.

From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service 

Front-Of fi ce/Customer I nteraction Center  Customer I nteraction Center  

Select your customer.In the Actions box, choose Contact Create  (call group Customer ).

In the Class field, enter the value 0008 Complaint .

In the Acti on f ield, enter the value 0001 Complaint about employee .

Enter a reason for the complaint in the editor and save the contract.

2-1-2 Call the same function again.

In the Class fi eld, enter the value 1001 Information .

In the Action f ield, enter the value 1001 General i nformation provided .

Enter a text of your choice for the information in the editor.

Switch to the Business Objects  tab page. 

To add links, click on the Add Objects button. 

Choose an object role that references the object type Contract .

The system calls the data finder to search for the specific contract.

In the contract field, enter TB010110##  and choose Find .

The electricity contract is included in the link list.

Proceed in a similar way to add contract account  TB010110##  to the list. Save

the contact.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 94/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-68

2-2

2-2-1 Choose the Documents tab page in the navigation area.

Choose Refresh.

The system displays a list of all contacts for this customer.

By double-clicking on the line, you can display the customer contact.

You can configure the system to display customer contacts in the applicationarea on the Customer overview tab page. The following contacts exist:

Date Class Action Type

10.03.99 Move-in New customer moves in -

16.04.98 Move-in New customer moves in -

16.04.98 Move-in New customer moves in -

Today’s date Complaint Complaint about employee

Today’s date Info. General information provided

2-2-2 In the Info  group in the Actions box, choose Customer overview .

The current customer contacts are listed in the table in the middle of the screen.

By double-clicking on the individual contacts, you activate the detail display.

2-2-3 From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry  I nformation System Report Selection Customer

Service Evaluate Customer Contacts .

Enter Contact Class 0008 Complaint as the selection cr iterion. Choose Execute  (F8 ).All contacts relating to complaints are displayed.

Return to the IC.

2-3

2-3-1 False.

You can also enter customer contact data manually.

The system creates the IC contact automatically.

To stop the customer contact being created, deactivate the contact log.

2-3-2 True.

2-3-3 False.

The information system can evaluate all customer contacts according to

different criteria.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 95/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-69

Solutions

Unit: Interaction Center (IC)

Topic: Master Data in SAP Utilities

3-1

3-1-1 Once you have identified the customer, call the Customer overview  in the

Information  call group.

Double-click on the account Pri vate Account 0## .

The system takes you to the master data display for the contract account.

Switch to the Payments/Taxes  tab page.

In the I ncoming Payments  area in the Bank Det. Inc. field you can see the bank

details for incoming payments.

Return to the customer overview.

3-1-2 Place the cursor in the address field of the business partner.

Choose Change  (F5 ).

The system takes you to the change master data screen for the business partner.

Switch to the Payment Transactions  tab page.

Enter new bank details.

In the ID  field, enter GIRO .In the Ctry  field, enter US . 

In the Bank Account  field, enter an account number.

In the Bank Key  field, use the F4  help to select a bank number.

Save the changes.

You have now allocated new bank details to the business partner.

Return to the customer overview.

3-1-3 Position the cursor on Pri vate Account 0## .

Choose Change.The system takes you to the change master data screen for the contract account.

Switch to the Payment/Taxes  tab page.Enter the new bank details for incoming payments.

Under I ncoming Payments , enter GIRO  in the Bank Det. I nc. field. When you

double-click on the Bank Det. Inc. field, the system displays the new bank data.

Save the changes.

You have now defined new bank details for incoming payments and have

returned to the customer overview.

Return to the IC.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 96/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-70

3-2

3-2-1 In the navigation area, select the second contract account.

Right-click to call Change Bank Data .

3-2-2 The system takes you to the business partner, to record the new bank details.

Switch to the Payment Transactions  tab page.

Enter new bank details.In the ID  field, enter COM .

In the Country  field, enter US .

In the Bank Account  field, enter an account number.

In the Bank Key  field, use the F4  help to select a bank number.

Save the changes.

You have now entered new bank details for the business partner and have

 been automatically directed to the selected contract account.

3-2-3 In the contract account, switch to the Payment/Taxes  tab page.

In the Bank Det. I nc. field, enter COM .

When you double-click on the Bank Det. Inc. field, the system displays the new bank data.

Save the changes.

You have now defined new bank details for incoming payments.

3-2-4 In the last step, you created a customer contact.

Enter a comment in the notes field at the bottom of the screen and save the

changes.

3-3

In the navigation area, select the contract and choose Change .In the Text  field, enter the name Communi ty contract 0## . Save the changes and return

to the IC. 

3-4

3-4-1 False.

You can use the SAP business partner model to assign different roles to a

 business partner. Only role-specific data which was not entered previously has

to be added.

3-4-2 False.The contract account settings are such that you can only enter 1 business

 partner. However, a business partner can have several contract accounts. When

you customize the contract account category, however, you can define the

contract account so that it can be allocated to several business partners.

3-4-3 True.

The contract account is the structure that allows the billing of posting data for

contracts or contract items that have the same collection/disbursement

agreements. A customer account is managed for a contract account.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 97/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-71

3-4-4 False.

The contract is an agreement between a business partners and a utility company

that applies to a particular division. It contains control data for billing, budget

 billing plans, and accounts receivable and payable accounting.

The rate data is stored in the installation and in the installation structure.

3-5

Enter the contract in the data finder and identify the business partner data. Double-click on

the contract TB010130##  to display the master data.

The following three logs are located under the Extras  menu:

1) Creation data

2) Field changes

3) Contract changes

3-6

3-6-1 False.

The connection object can also be a piece of land, fountain, or building site.

3-6-2 True.

3-6-3 False.

The connection object is at the top of the functional location hierarchy.

3-6-4 True.

Device locations are mapped as functional locations in the PM component and

the connection object is the superordinate functional location.

3-6-5 False.

Devices are installed in device locations and are thus only indirectly allocated

to the connection object.

3-6-6 False.

The premise is only used in SAP Utilities to group together installations of

different divisions.

3-6-7 True.

Devices, registers, and fixed payment billing factors assigned to a premise that

are to be billed jointly are grouped together for a specific division.

A premise can have several installations.These installations can refer to the same or different divisions.

3-6-8 True.

The billing class and rate category are allocated to the installation.

They have a considerable influence on the billing process.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 98/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 2-72

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 99/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-1

SAP AG 2009

The business processes New Contract, EndContract and Move Contract initiated in CRM andMove-In, Move-In/Out and Move-Out in ERP

Effects on both the business and technical masterdata

Contents:

Move-In/Out

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 100/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-2

SAP AG 2009

Move-In/Out: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the business processesMove-In, Move-Out, and Move-In/Out

Describe the business processes New Contract,End Contract and Move Contract

Execute the business processesMove-In, Move-Out, and Move-In/Out

Explain the changes to the master data

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 101/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-3

SAP AG 2009

Move-In: Business Scenario

A customer calls and requests to initiate service in

a location.

 You execute the process with the following steps:

Check if the customer is an existing business

partner 

Search for and identify the premise as well as the

start date for the service

Enter and check the personal data

Check the meter reading results

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 102/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-4

SAP AG 2009

Definition of Move-In

Move-In

Installation

Contract

With a Move-In, a contract is generatedfor each selected installation at a

premise

Contractaccount

Businesspartner 

 

  You use the Move-In to execute a large number of activities that are required to create the business

 partner supply. You create business master data or change existing data. In particular, you allocate a

contract to an installation.

  When you process a move-in, you can make a contract billable. You can also trigger payment

requests levied at the start of supply and a welcome letter from the Move-In.

  The New Contract creation process in CRM also generates a Move-in in ERP.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 103/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-5

SAP AG 2009

Move-In: Prerequisite Technical Master Data

Connection

object

Premise

Installation

Device

The following technical master

data must be entered before

Move-In:

Connection object

Premise

Installation

A device can be installed

before Move-In, but this is nota prerequisite.

 

  The technical master data is represented in CRM by the IBase and IBase components.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 104/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-6

SAP AG 2009

Move-In: Business Master Data

Businesspartner 

Contractaccount

Contract

Should be re-used for existingcustomers

Can be re-used for existingcustomers

Is created during Move-In

 

  Each of these entities can be created during the Move-in process itself.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 105/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 106/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-8

SAP AG 2009

Contract Management - Master Data

SAP CRMSAP IS-U

Contract

Business Agreement

Business

Partner 

ConnectionObject

PoD

Contract

Contract Account

Business

Partner 

Installation

Billing

Bill

ConnectionObject

ConsumptionPremise

PoD &Premise

New

 

  The New Contract creation process connects technical and business master data in CRM and ERP.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 107/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-9

SAP AG 2009

Move-In to SAP Utilities House

Service Connection ElectricityService Connection: GasService Conn. Water 

Supplygrid

Street

Basement

Apartment 2

Apartment 3

Apartment 1EntranceHall

Connection Object

= Premise

Dev. location:Basement

Dev. location:

Basement

Dev. location:Corridor 

Dev. location:Corridor 

Businesspartner 

Contractaccount

Contractaccount

Utilityinstallation 1:

Electr. meter 

Utilityinstallation 1:

Electr. meter 

Utilityinstallation 2:Gas meter 

Utilityinstallation 2:Gas meter 

Contract 1:Electricity

Contract 1:Electricity

Contract 2:Gas

Contract 2:Gas

Utilityinstallation 3:

Water meter 

Utilityinstallation 3:

Water meter 

Contract 3:

Water 

Contract 3:

Water 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 108/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-10

SAP AG 2009

Move-In: Process

Customer 

moves in

Contract

Business

partner, account

Welcome

letter 

Meter 

reading

Customer 

contact

Customer 

visit/

call

Vali-

dation

Budget billing

plan

Move-Incompleted

Security

deposit

Co n trac t 

 Ban k details 1

 Pa yme ntm e thod1

A lter nat i ve  payer  1

....CA docu me nt1

CA doc u ment 3

31July

BBamount

 € 250

Move-in

Mrs. Smith

Move-in/out

Move-In

 

   Necessary Move-In steps:

•  Identify premise

•  Identify or enter customer

•  Select and, if necessary, process contract account or create new contract account

•  Create contracts

  Optional Move-In steps:

•  Supplement contact data

•  Prepare and carry out move-in meter reading

•  Record results of move-in meter reading

•  Maintain rate data

•  Check whether the billing construct can be billed

•  Maintain creditworthiness manually, or display result of automatic scoring

•  Request cash security deposit

•  Create budget billing plan

•  Create welcome letter

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 109/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-11

SAP AG 2009

Move-Out: Business Scenario

A customer reports a Move-Out.

 You execute the Move-Out with the following steps:

Identify the customer 

Enter the Move-Out date

Maintain the personal data (new address)

Create a meter reading order 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 110/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-12

SAP AG 2009

Move-Out Move-Outcomplete

Customer reports

Move-Out

Contact data

Contract Final meter

reading results

Finalbilling

Budgetbillingplan

Move-Out

confirmation

Customermoves-out

Co n trac t

 Bank deta ils 1

 Pa yment me thod1

A lte rna tive pa yer 1

.... F I-CA docu me  nt 1

 FI-CA docum en t3

31July

BBamount$250

X

X

Move-Out: Process

 

  Essential steps for Move-Out

•  Identify and choose customer and contract

•  Enter Move-Out date

•  Enter final meter reading results

  Optional steps for Move-Out

•  Add contact data

•  Edit the customer moving out and the contract account

•  Prepare and carry out final meter reading

•  Carry out final billing immediately and print and issue final invoice

•  Create move-out confirmation

  IS-U will do the following for you:

•  Terminate contracts

•  Stop any budget billing collection

•  Suspend any current dunning procedure

•  Change any dunning procedures that may affect open items

•  The Move-out terminates the relationship between the business master data and the technical

data, timesliced by the move-out date.

•  The End Contract process initiated in CRM generates a Move-out and terminates the relationship.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 111/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-13

SAP AG 2009

Move-In/Out: Business Example

A new customer reports a Move-In and the Move-Out of the previous customer.

 You execute the Move-In/Out with the followingsteps:

Check if the customer is an existing businesspartner 

Enter the premise and the Move-In/Out date

Enter and check the personal data

Enter the meter-reading results

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 112/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-14

SAP AG 2009

Move-Out Move-In

T r a n s p o r t 

Move-In/Out: Process

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 113/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 114/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-16

SAP AG 2009

Move-In/Out: No Changes to Installation Data

Move-Out

Contract 2

01.02.2003

. 3rd

Move-In

Nov. 2nd Dec. 2nd Jan Mar. 3rd  Apr. 3rd May 3rdFeb. 3rd

Customer 1 Customer 2

Installation

Move-in

Contract 1

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 115/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 116/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 117/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-19

Exercises – Web Client

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: New Contract Creation

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Process new contract creation via CRM

•  Display the generated contract in ECC

A customer comes in person to the service center and informs you that she

would like utility contracts for an unoccupied apartment.

You use the IC to perform the move-in with today’s date as the start date.

1-1 Logon with user IUT110-##  to the SAP CRM System TPZ .

1-2 A business partner requests to initiate service at a location

1-2-1 Identify the customer  

The customer tells you his name is Tom SnyderHe provides his address as 30## Elm Street, New York City

Identify the customer in the system.

1-2-2 Confirm the premise to be moved into

Mr Snyder needs a contract for the apartment at 30## Park Avenue.

Search for and confirm the premise into which Mr Snyder wants to move.

The premise should then be copied into the Account Information section of the IC

and the technical data copied Enter the number of the connection object here:

 _____________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 118/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-20

1-2-3 Execute the new contract creation

In the IC, begin the process using the Contract Management  item on the

 Navigation bar and by choosing New Contracts .

The system defaults the current date as the move-in date.

Perform the move-in for all the installations in the premise.

Enter ISU_ELE_RESI  as the product.

Enter a new home phone number to be used: (212) 555-30##

Enter a new cash security request for 100 USD.

After saving the process, enter the number of the new contract here:

 ____________________________

1-2-4 Log into the TNU-770 backend system and inspect the contract which has been

created in the previous step.

The logon process is described in the Soluti on of this exercise .

1-2-5 Display the new information for the current business partner in the overview

Display the account balance overview.

You can find a security deposit request here.

Display it and note the document number:

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 119/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 120/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-22

2-1-3 Perform the move-out

In the IC, perform the move-out by choosing Contract Management > End

Contracts .

Verify the contract(s) selected for completion.

End date

Last day of the current monthOn the Account & Payment Data  view, enter a new phone number for Mr.

Jackson.

Click on the Submit  button to save the process.

View the results

Click on the End  button to end the interaction.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 121/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-23

Exercises – Web Client(optional)

Chapter 3:

Move In/Out – Start of Supply via IC WebClient

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Execute standard IC WebClient processes for Utilities

•  Get familiar with the related configuration

A potential customer hears that the retailer, Sunshine Inc., offers good

 prices for supplying electricity. He would like to start his supply with the

supplier Sunshine Inc.

The prospect contacts the call center agent. The Agent identifies the caller

and enters his service location into the system. Afterwards he starts a

Start of Supply process for this new customer.

4-1  Logon with user IUT110-##  to the SAP CRM System TPZ  or TTZ .

Check, whether the new customer is already known in the system.

In the Search for Business Partner  area enter the following data:

 Name Last Kidman##  

 Name First Alice  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 122/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 123/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 124/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-26

1-2-3 Execute the new contract creation

In the IC, begin the process using the Contract Management  item on the

 Navigation bar and by choosing New Contracts .

Perform the move-in for all the installations in the premise.

Enter ISU_ELE_RESI  as the product.Click on Account and Payment Data  to follow the guided procedure.

Enter a new home phone number to be used: (212) 555-30##

Click on the Security Deposit Amount  field to bring up the Security Deposit

 Requests view. Enter a requested amount of 100 USD and a reason New

customer .

Click on Summary  to follow the guided procedure and finish the transaction.

Verify that the transaction is complete and click on the Submit  button.

After saving the process, you can find the contract number in the contract list.1-2-4 Log into the TNU-770 backend system and inspect the contract which has been

created in the previous step.

From the SAPlogon pad, choose system TNU. Enter client number 770.

Log into TNU-770 with userid IUT110-## and initial password init .

Execute transaction ES22 – Display Contract  and enter the contract number

from the previous step. Navigate to the 3rd tab to see the product allocation and

the other move-in information.

1-2-5 Back in the CRM system, click on the Overview  button in the Navigation bar to

view the data environment for the customer.

Click on the Account Balance  button in the Navigation bar to view the account

 balance overview.

Clcik on the hotspot in the Balance Overview  view to view the acount balance

and the related documents.

The document shown is the Cash Security Deposit Request created during the

move-in.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 125/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-27

Solutions – Web Client

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-Out

2-1 Business partner move-out

2-1-1 Identify the customer

David Jackson lives in Elm Street 40##, 10022 New York City.

Identify the customer in the system.

Once you have done this, the business partner should be available in the IC.

Account number ISU11040##

2-1-2 Obtain an overview of the data environment of Mr Jackson. To do this, click onthe Overview view from the Navigation bar

How many contract accounts does he have? One

account_________________

How many utility contracts does he have? ___One

contract_________________

Complete the following table with the corresponding object keys:

Division Contract Installation

Are there any outstanding receivables for Mr Jackson’s account?

 _No___________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 126/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-28

2-1-3 Perform the move-out

In the IC, perform the move-out by choosing Contract Management > End

Contracts .

Verify the contract(s) selected for completion.

End dateLast day of the current month

On the Account & Payment Data  view, enter a new phone number for Mr.

Jackson.

Click on the Submit  button to save the process.

View the results

Click on the End  button to end the interaction.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 127/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-29

Solution – Web Client (optional)

Chapter 3:

Move In/Out – Start of Supply via IC WebClient

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•  Execute standard IC WebClient processes for Utilities

•  Get familiar with the related configuration

A potential customer hears that the retailer, Sunshine Inc., offers good

 prices for supplying electricity. He would like to start his supply with the

supplier Sunshine Inc.

The prospect contacts the call center agent. The Agent identifies the caller

and enters his service location into the system. Afterwards he starts a

Start of Supply process for this new customer.

4-1  Logon with user IUT110-##  to the SAP CRM System TPZ  or  TTZ .

The logon process is described in the Soluti on of the optional Exercise in Chapter 2 .

Check, whether the new customer is already known in the system.

In the Search for Business Partner  area enter the following data:

 Name Last Kidman##  

 Name First Alice  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 128/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-30

4-2  Create a new Service Location.

In the Connection Object  area enter the following data:

Street Castle Dr ive ##  

City 69190 Walldorf  

Country DE  

Region 08  

In the Premise  area enter the following data:

 Number of Persons 2  

Floor 1  

Premise Type Three-room apartment  

In the Point-Of-Delivery  area enter the following data:

PoD ID ISU_POD_1##  

Division Electricity  

Grid Level Type Vol tage Level  is preset as soon as you entered Electricity  Grid Level Low Voltage  

Grid Low Voltage Grid SWB  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 129/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-31

4-3  Start the Start of Supply Process

Create a contract for the Point-of-Delivery.

Choose Contract Management -> New Contracts .

Product ISU_E_SUPPLY_01  

Start date The f ir st of the over-next month  

Choose Action_ID Start of Supply (NS view). 

Enter the Market Communication Data.

Distributor SP_SWA (= key of Municipal Utility Company)

 New Service Provider SP_SAG (= key of your Company Sunshine Inc.)

Choose Account and Payment Data :

Create a new Business Agreement :

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 130/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 131/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-33

Exercises - CIC

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-In

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Process a complete move-in in the system

•  Display the generated move-in document

A customer comes in person to the service center and informs you that she

would like utility contracts for an unoccupied apartment.

You use the IC to perform the move-in with today’s date as the start date.

1-1 A business partner moves in to a premise.

1-1-1 Identify the customer  

The customer tells you her name is Constance Bishop.

She is currently living in Massachusetts Avenue 0##, 02116 Boston.

Identify the customer in the system.

Once you have done this, the business partner should be available in the IC.

1-1-2 Identify the new premise

Mrs Bishop needs contracts for the new apartment on East Side Highway 0##.

Identify the premise into which Mrs Bishop wants to move.

The premise should then appear on the Clipboard  tab page. From the Find  action,

choose I denti fy Premise . In the data finder, choose the Technical Data  tab page

and enter the street and house number in the Connection Object  area.

Choose Find .

If a premise is found, this will appear in the navigation area on the Clipboard  tab

 page. Select the entry and display the premise by clicking on the right mouse

 button and choosing the Display action.Enter the number of the premise here: _____________

Choose Envir onment -> Data  to answer the following question:

Which installations for Mrs Bishop's new apartment are in the premise? Enter

them in the following table:

Installation number Division

Return to the IC.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 132/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-34

1-1-3 Perform the move-in

In the IC, perform the move-in from the Move I /O  action by choosing M/In:

Known Customer .

Use the objects that you saved to the Clipboard  tab page. Select these two entries

on the Clipboard.

The system prompts you to maintain the move-in date in an

additional step in the IC. Enter today’s date here.

When you are asked, Do you want to adopt an existing contract account? ,

answer No. 

Perform the move-in for all the installations in the premise.

You are now in the move-in processing screen.

Name/Administration  tab page

In the contact data, record the fact that Mrs Bishop came by in person.

Bank Data  tab page

Since Mrs Bishop has confirmed that she will continue to use the same

account, you do not need to make any changes here.

Payment Data  tab page 

Check the payment methods that were entered. Mrs Bishop has agreed that any

credit may be transferred to her bank account.

Change the outgoing payment method accordingly.

Contracts  tab page

Enter the following values in the new contracts: 

Switch between the contracts by clicking on the Electricity,

Gas, and Water tab pages.

Division Contract Text

01 East Side Highway 0## – Electricity

02 East Side Highway 0## – Gas

03 East Side Highway 0## – Water

Meter Reading Data  tab page 

Check whether meter readings already exist

If not, estimate them:

Select all the registers and choose Estimate.

Save the move-in.

Return to the IC.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 133/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-35

1-1-4 Display the current business partner data.

Choose Refresh  in the navigation area on the Environment  tab page.

The system displays the new data you have created.

Choose Refresh  in the navigation area on the Documents  tab page.

A new contract exists.

Display this by double-clicking on it.

Choose the Business Objects tab page.You can find the move-in document here now.

Display it and note the document number:

 ______________________________________________________

1-1-5 Customer overview 

Display the customer overview for Constance Bishop.

 Note the premise in the bottom part of the screen.

1-1-6 Customer environment 

Display the customer environment for Constance Bishop.

1-2 True or false?

1-2-1 Move-in is a workflow process.

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-2 A move-in connects the contracts of a business partner to the installations of a

 premise.

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-3 The installation shows the move-in date.

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-4 When a move-in takes place, a business partner and his/her contract accounts

and contracts must already exist in the system.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 134/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-36

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 135/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-37

Exercises - CIC

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-Out

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Process a complete move-out in the system

•  Display the generated move-out document

A customer telephones and informs you that she is moving out at the end

of the month.

You perform the move-out in the IC and enter the customer’s new

address.

You also request a meter reading order.

2-1 Business partner move-out

2-1-1 Identify the customer

Sarah Peterson lives in Massachusetts Avenue 1##, 02116 Boston.

Identify the customer in the system.

Once you have done this, the business partner should be available in the IC.

2-1-2 Obtain an overview of the data environment of Mrs Peterson. To do this, choose

Customer Environment .

How many contract accounts does she have?

 _________________________

How many utility contracts does she have? _________________________

Complete the following table with the corresponding object keys:

Division Contract Installation

Are there any outstanding receivables for Mrs Peterson’s account?

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 136/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-38

2-1-3 Perform the move-out

In the IC, perform the move-out from the Move I /O  action by choosing

Move-Out Partner .

Use the object that you saved to the Clipboard  tab page. Select the business

 partner  Sarah Peterson on the Clipboard. 

Move-out date

Last day of the current month

Address Data  tab page

Enter Mrs Peterson's new address:

Independence Avenue 0##, 02116 Boston.

MR Data  tab page 

Create a meter reading order for the meters.

Save the move-out.

Return to the IC and update your data.

...

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 137/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-39

Exercises - CIC

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-In/Out

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Perform a move-in/out in the system

•  Display related documents

•  Understand the move-in/out data environment

Harry Jones is moving into the premise

Constitution Avenue 0##, 02116 Boston, tomorrow.

The previous tenant moved out of the premise today.

Mr Jones reports the move-out and his subsequent move-in, and provides

the meter readings for all the registers.

3-1 Move-in/move-out of a premise

3-1-1 Identify the new customer

Determine whether Harry0## Jones is already a customer.

Mr Jones does not exist in the system.

Create the business partner in the selection area.

To do this, choose the Create  button and maintain the following data: 

Field Name Value

Title Mr

Category Person

Gender Male

 Last name Jones 

 First name Harry0##

Street Constitution Avenue

 Number 0##

 Postal code 02116

City Boston

Country US

Choose Enter .

Identify Mr Jones again and then choose Enter  twice.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 138/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-40

3-1-2 Identify the premise and its environment

Identify the premise Constitution Avenue 0##, Boston. From the Info  action, choose

Connection Object Envi ronment .

Find out who was previously registered as a contract partner at that address.

Business Partner Number: _____________________________

 Name: _____________________________________________

Select the premise and choose Object to Clipboard  or F8 .

3-1-3 Perform the move-in/out

Perform the move-in/out in the IC by starting Premise Move-I n/Out . Use the objects

stored on the Clipboard  to do this, namely the business partner Harry0## Jones  and

the premise Constituti on Avenue 0##,02116 Boston. 

You are on the initial move-in/out screen.

You can check the move-in or move-out date from here, for example.

ChooseEnter 

.You are now in move-out processing.

Move-out: Address Data  tab page

Enter Mrs Smith's new address:

Apple Tr ee Lane 0## , 12345 Washington DC .

Move-out: MR Data  tab page

Estimate all the meter readings.

Move-out: Save the move-out.

You are now in move-in processing.

Move-in: Bank Data  tab page

Mr Jones has account number 08154711##  with the Mellon Bank in Boston .

Move-in: Payment Data  tab page

Mr Jones agrees to a direct debit and would like any credit balances to be

transferred to this account.

Move-in: MR Data  tab page

Check the meter reading data.

Have the meter readings from the move-out been transferred?

What is their meter reading type?

Move-in: Save the move-in.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 139/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-41

3-1-4 Data environment for the premise after the move-in/out

Display the premise environment.

Which new contracts were created?

Division Contract Installation

Switch the view from today’s data to a view that comprises the data for a

 particular period (for example 01/01/1998 to tomorrow).

 Note that the historical display of the contracts for the premise’s installation

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 140/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-42

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 141/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-43

Solutions - CIC

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-In

1-1 Business partner move-in to a premise

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service→ Front-Of fi ce/Customer I nteraction Center

→ Customer I nteraction Center

1-1-1 Identify the customer

Enter the following data in the search criteria:

Field Name Value

 Last name Bishop or Bish*

 First name Constance or Co*

Street Massachusetts Avenue or M*

 House number 0##

 Postal code 02100 or initial value

City Boston or initial value

Choose Enter  until the data is displayed in the navigation area.You can now find the identified business partner on the Clipboard  tab page.

1-1-2 Identify the new premise.

Enter the following data in the search criteria on the Technical Data tab page:

Field Name Value

Street East Side Highway or Ea*

 House number 0##

You can now find the premise you were looking for on the Clipboard  tab page.

To display the desired premise information:

Select the premise on the Clipboard  tab page

and click the right mouse button to choose Display.

In the premise display, choose Environment Data.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 142/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-44

The number of the premise is TB060110## . 

Installation number Division

TB060110## Electricity

TB060120## Water

TB060170## GasReturn to the IC.

1-1-3 Perform the move-in

The business partner line on the clipboard is selected.

Select the premise line on the clipboard too.

In the Move I /O  action, choose M/in: known customer .

Enter today’s date  in the Move-in date field.

Choose Execute  (F8 ).

When you are asked, Do you want to adopt an existing contract account? ,answer no. 

Confirm that you want to execute the move-in for all three installations in the

 premise.

Name/Administration  tab page, Contact Data  view 

The personal visit that Mrs Bishop makes to the customer center is saved as the

type of contact. Use the F4 input help top select the value Personal .

Payment Data  tab page

Field Name Value

Outgoing Payment

 Methods

 B

Outgoing Bank Details 1

Contracts  tab page

Division Contract Text

01 East Side Highway 0## – Electricity

02 East Side Highway 0## – Gas

03 East Side Highway 0## – Water

Meter Reading Data  tab page 

Check whether meter readings already exist

If not, estimate them.

Select all the registers and choose Estimate.

Save the move-in.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 143/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-45

1-1-4 Display the business partner data.

Proceed as described in the exercise.

1-1-5 Customer Overview

From the Info  action, choose Customer Overview .

Return to the IC.1-1-6 Customer environment

From the Info  action, choose Customer Envir onment . 

Return to the IC.

1-2 True or false?

1-2-1 False.

All steps must be performed by one employee at the same time and without

interruption.

1-2-2 True.

1-2-3 False.

Move-in and move-out dates are managed in the contract.

However, the installation is assigned to a contract after move-in.

1-2-4 False.

During move-in, a new business partner can be added and the contract account

and contracts created.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 144/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-46

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 145/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-47

Solutions - CIC

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-Out

2-1 Business partner move out

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service→ Front-Of fi ce/Customer I nteraction Center

→ Customer I nteraction Center

2-1-1 Identify the customer

Enter the following data in the search criteria:

Field Name Value

 Last name Peterson or Pe*

 First name Sarah

Street Massachusetts Avenue

 House number 1##

 Postal code 02116 or initial value

City Boston or initial value

Choose Enter  until the data is available in the navigation area.

You can find the identified business partner on the clipboard now too.

2-1-2 Navigation area: Customer overview and customer environment

From the Info  action, choose Customer Envir onment .

How many contract accounts does Mrs. Peterson have?

No. of contract accounts Contract account number

1 TB010140##

How many utility contracts does Mrs. Peterson have? 2 

Division Contract Installation

 Electricity TB010160## TB010160##

Water TB010170## TB010170##

Return to the Customer Interaction Center.

From the Info  action, choose Customer Overview .

Are there any outstanding receivables for Mrs. Peterson’s account? Yes. 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 146/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-48

2-1-3 Perform the move-out

The business partner line on the clipboard is selected.

From the Move I /O  action, choose Move-out partner .

Enter the move-out date

Name/Admini stration tab page, Address Data  viewField Name Values

Street Independence Avenue

 House number 0##

 Postal code 02116

City Boston

Meter reading data tab page 

Activate the service noti f /order  indicator. 

Save the move-out.

Return to the IC.

Update the Environment  and Documents  tab pages in the navigation area.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 147/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-49

Solutions - CIC

Unit: Move-In/Out

Topic: Move-In/Out

3-1 Move-in/out of a premise 

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service→ Fr ont Off ice/Customer I nteraction Center→ 

Customer Interaction Center

3-1-1 Identify the new customer

Enter the following data in the search criteria:

Field Name Value

 Last name Jones

 First name Harry0##

Search results:

Using the specif ied selections, no object f rom in the business partner category

was found. 

Create the business partner.

Choose Enter  until the data for the new business partner you have created

appears on the clipboard.

3-1-2 Identify the premise and its environment

Proceed as described in the exercise.

Business partner Last name

TB00011001 Ashley Smith

Return to the IC .

3-1-3 Perform a move-in/out for a premise.

Select both objects from the clipboard.

From theMove I /O 

 action, choosePremise move-in/out 

. You can correct any datahere if necessary.

You start processing the move-in/out by choosing Enter .

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 148/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-50

Move-out: Address data tab page

Field Name Values

Street Apple Tree Lane

 House number 0##

 Postal code 12345City Washington DC

Move-out: Tab page MR Data

Select all registers

Choose Estimate.

Move-out: Save the move-out document.

The system switches to move-in processing.

Move-in : Bank Data  tab page Field Name Values

 ID 1

Country US

 Bank Key 083000108

 Bank Account 08154711##

Move-in:  Payment Data  tab page 

Field Name Values

 Incoming Payment Method D (Direct debit)

 Incoming Bank Details 1

Outgoing Payment Methods  B (Outgoing paym./bank

transfer)

Outgoing Bank Details 1

Move-in: MR Data  tab page The meter readings are taken from move-out processing.

The meter reading type is 04 Derived meter reading. 

Move-in: Save the move-in document.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 149/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-51

3-1-4  Data environment of the premise after the move-in/out

In the navigation area refresh the Environment  tab page.

Use the right mouse button to select the premise and choose  Premise

environment .

 New contracts

Division Contract Installation

Internally assigned contract number TB000110##

Internally assigned contract number TB000120##

Data environment from 01/01/1998 – to date

Choose Per iod F7  and enter 01.01.1998 in the Valid from  field.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 150/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 3-52

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 151/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-1

SAP AG 2009

Technical Objects in Work Management

Service Orders and Service Objects

Service Products

Interfaces to External Systems

Contents:

Work Management

 

  In a utility company a large number of work orders are accepted, planned, calculated, carried out,

and if necessary, billed to a customer. SAP Utilities uses functions that already exist in the various

components of the SAP standard system to manage these orders. These functions are merged with

specific business processes in Work Management for SAP Utilities, and a large number of industry-

specific functions have been added.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 152/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 153/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-3

SAP AG 2009

Work Management: Business Scenario I

Acquisition, planning, calculation, execution of internal andexternal work orders

Creation of invoices for customers

Examples:

Creation and expansion of service connections

Energy consulting

Unscheduled meter reading

Disconnection and reconnection

Maintenance

Repairs

Installation, extension or removalof technical equipment

 

  The daily work of a utility company involves the processing of a large number of work orders. The

orders must be accepted, planned, calculated, executed, and when necessary, billed to a customer.

  In this process, a distinction needs to be made between external work orders relating to the customer

services and internal work orders.

•  External work orders are mapped using service orders from the Customer Service (CS)

component.

•  Internal work orders are mapped using maintenance orders from the Plant Maintenance (PM)

component.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 154/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-4

SAP AG 2009

Work Management: Business Scenario II

Plant maintenance

Managementof power plants

Utilities industry servicesin which Work Management is deployed:

Typical services for private / commercial customers in theareas of ...... . .

Grid services

• Energy distribution• Installation• Electricity supply• Meter reading

Generation Transmission Distribution

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 155/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-5

SAP AG 2003

Technical Objects in Work Management

Service orders and service objects

Service products

Interfaces to external systems

Work Management: Technical Objects

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 156/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-6

SAP AG 2009

Technical Objects: Overview

PM/CSSAPUtiliti

es

Customer Service

PlantMaintenance

Description:

Technical objects intransmission anddistribution

Example:

Transformer substation

Transmission lines

Transformer stations

Power transformers

Switching stations

Description:Technical objects with adirect reference tocustomers

Example:

Connection object

Premise

Device location

Devices

Technical installation

Technical objectsin

supply area

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 157/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-7

SAP AG 2009

Technical Objects: PM Supply Grid

Field01

Field02

Field 03

Field01

Field02

Field 03

Field01 Field02

Field 03

Distribution station ST 435(funct. loc.)

Distribution station ST 571

Distribution station ST 768

Line no. 187(funct. loc.)

Line no. 189

Line no. 186(funct. loc.)

Line no. 188

Line network with subsections

Object connection used to connecttwo systems with different

hierarchies

Distribution station withtransformer fields

Transformer fields

Pylons(equip.)

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 158/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-8

SAP AG 2009

Technical Objects: SAP Utilities Connection Object

Technicalinstallations(equipment)

0

125.256.01

071619207161927

Conn. objectfunc. loc.)

Premise

Connection(equipment)

Premise

Devices (equipment)

Device location(func. loc.)

Transformer (equipment)

05398020539802

07161927

125.256.01

 

  In addition to the technical master data previously shown in unit 2, this figure also shows the

connection and the technical installation (of both pieces of equipment).

  The connection is used to show the link between the supply grid and the connection object. In the

"service connection" workflow template provided by SAP, the connection is created in one of the

last steps and installed in the functional location, the SAP Utilities connection object.

  The connection is dependent on the division.

  The technical installation is not absolutely necessary in the SAP Utilities data model.

It can be regarded as a supplement to the technical master data.

It is used to map technical installations without having a direct influence on billing.

Examples are large lighting systems, gardens, and so on.

  The technical installation is dependent on the division.

  A maximum of one technical installation can be created for each division in a premise. A piece of

equipment is created in PM automatically.

  The SAP Utilities "inspections" process enables you to maintain technical installations regularly.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 159/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-9

SAP AG 2003

Technical Objects in Work Management

Service orders and service objects

Service products

Interfaces to external systems

Work Management: Service Orders and Objects

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 160/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-10

SAP AG 2009

Maintenance of appliances

Home installation checks (inspections)

PremisePremise

m e t e r  n r :  3 2 4 5 6 1 

m e t e r  n r :  3 2 4 5 6 1 

r e a d i n g  :   _ _ _ _ _ _

r e a d i n g  :   _ _ _ _ _ _

Home installation services

Damage repairs

Device services (installation, removal, replacement)

Aperiodic meter reading

Disconnection/reconnection

Other on-site services

Services

OFFOFF

ONON

 

  The reference points of the services are

•  Connection object

•  Device location

•  Device

•  Technical installation

  The creation of service orders is integrated in the SAP Utilities processes. This includes, for

example,

•  Aperiodic meter readings

•  Disconnection and reconnection

•  Device replacement

•  Inspections

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 161/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-11

SAP AG 2009

Work Order Structure

For example: Protective clothing, crane,

traffic lights, fire extinguishers,signs, excavator 

For example: Material, quantities, units of measure,Storage location, batch, item category,availability

For example: Work center, control key,description, standard time,activity type, wages

Equipment (assembly)Functional locationsMaintenance notifications

Operations

For example: Order type, dates, plant, reference object, priority, descriptionOrder Header 

Object list

Material list

Billing rule

Costs (planned/actual)

Production resources

 

  Header data is information used to identify and manage maintenance orders. This information

applies to the whole order. Examples of header data are the order number, description, order type,

dates for order execution, priority, the person who created the order and the person who last changed

it.

  The object list contains functional locations, equipment, assemblies, maintenance notifications,

and/or materials with serial numbers. You can enter a single object as a reference object in the order

header and enter several objects in the object list.

  Operations are used to describe the work to be carried out according to the order (the operation

includes, for example, the work center, the time required and the control key).

  Materials are spare parts that are needed and consumed to execute the order.

  Production resources (for example, tools, protective clothing, and special heavy goods vehicles)

are also needed to execute the order, but are not actually consumed in the order.

  The data in the billing rule states who is usually responsible for the costs. The data is taken as

 proposals from the master record of the reference object. It can, however, be changed during the first

stages of the billing process for the order.

  The cost data informs you of the estimated costs, as well as the planned and actual costs of the

order, the relevant cost categories for the order, the updating of key figures in the PMIS with value

categories, and the updating of these key figures with actual costs.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 162/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-12

SAP AG 2009

Work Order Process Flow

For service orders only

Planning

Release

Printing

Confirmation

Technical completion

Billing document

Billing

Business completion

Execution

Entry/notification

 

  Processing starts when a customer or employee reports an outage, disruption, or other request (such

as a modification request). An order can be created directly or on the basis of a notification.

  Typical planning tasks include defining operations, reserving spare parts, or determining working

hours.

  The order is then transferred to scheduling and control. Availability is checked, required capacity is

 provided, and the necessary shop papers are printed.

  Execution includes obtaining spare parts from stock and actually executing the order.

  Once work is complete, the actual times required to complete the work are recorded. Other technical

information is also entered to document repairs and define the status of the technical system. The

order is then billed in Controlling.  Billing is performed prior to invoicing for a service order and a bill is created for the customer.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 163/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 164/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-14

SAP AG 2009

Work Order Example: Service Object Repair 

Customer complains

about defective device

Service order with task list,resources, and materials, are sent to theresponsible technician

Agent selects serviceobject in IC

 

  In the IC, you can trigger the generation of a repair order by first selecting the relevant customer and

then starting the process.

  Select the corresponding technical object from the displayed customer overview screen.

  The repair order is created automatically.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 165/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-15

SAP AG 2009

Work Order with Appointment Scheduling in the IC

Agree date

Planning horizon: Standard

Required capacity: 60 minutes

Time

8:00 - 9:00

9:00 - 10:00

10:00 - 11:00

11:00 - 12:00

13:00 - 14:00

2.12.2010 3.12.2010 4.12.2010 5.12.2010

80 / 120

80 / 120

120 / 120

60 / 12060 / 120

0 / 1200 / 120 80 / 120

80 / 120

120 / 120120 / 120

60 / 12060 / 120

60 / 12060 / 120

60 / 12060 / 120

60 / 12060 / 120 0 / 1200 / 120

0 / 1200 / 120

0 / 1200 / 120

120 / 120120 / 120

0 / 1200 / 120 0 / 1200 / 120

0 / 1200 / 120

60 / 12060 / 120

Work center 

X

X

X

 

  In the IC you can trigger the generation of a repair order with appointment scheduling by first

selecting the relevant customer and then starting the "Repair Order with Date" process.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 166/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-16

SAP AG 2003

Technical Objects in Work Management

Service orders and service objects

Service products

Interfaces to external systems

Work Management: Service Products

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 167/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-17

SAP AG 2009

Service Product Concept

Sales viewprice information

Description of work to be done,resources for work, material...

external resources

CharacteristicsValues

Dependencies

Connection object

device….

Technicalobject

Config.

Serviceorder 

Serviceproduct

Customer order 

Instructions

Servicematerial

 

  SAP Utilities uses the customer order from the Sales and Distribution component (SD) and the

service order from Customer Service (CS) to process customer-related business transactions. These

documents are connected by way of a service product. The service product is a service that is sold in

SD and rendered in CS.

  The system includes the task list and the technical object in the service order. You can use the

configuration to define and analyze the task list individually. You can also use it to influence the

 price of the service product.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 168/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-18

SAP AG 2009

Service Product Example: Service Connection

Task list

1. Dig trenchTime: 0.5h per mTool: Excavator 

2. Secure excavationonly if soil is loose

3. Lay cableMaterial: X m cable

4. Install connection boxTime: 1h

Material: Connection box

5. Fill trenchTime: 0.2h per m

Configuration

CharacteristicsValues

Ground: Light

Length: 10m

Connection type: A

Internal servicesYes

Service material

Cable per m 60.00

Trench per m 150.00

Connection boxType A 1,200.00

Type B 1,500.00

BB amount for internal

services 300.00

Service object

Service product

Service order Quotation, customer order 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 169/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 170/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-20

SAP AG 2003

Technical objects in Work Management

Service orders and service objects

Service products

Interfaces to external systems

Work Management: Interfaces to External Systems

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 171/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-21

SAP AG 2009

Overview of Interfaces

SCADA

ResourcePlanning

Outage

Analysis

WorkManag.

ERP

Standard

Applications

Service ordersConfirmations

Outagenotificationsand orders

OutagesConfirmations

Transformerstation outages

Connection information

Monitoring ofthe situation

Geographicaldata

Service ordersConfirmations

MDI Mobile

Devices

SAPUtilitiesGBC

AM/FMGIS

 

  GBC: GIS Business Connector

  GIS: Geographical Information System

  AM/FM: Asset Management / Facility Management

  MDI: Mobile Data Interface

  SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 172/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-22

SAP AG 2009

GIS Interface and Integration with the GBC

Transformer station

Connection object

Device location

Object identification

Connectivity info

Object identification

Connectivity info

SAP GISGBC

Or

PI

Transformer 

Connection

Device

 

  The GIS Business Connector enables business processes to run seamlessly between an SAP system

and a GIS. The GBC can

•  call GIS functions and data from the SAP System

•  call SAP system functions and data from the GIS

  In addition to this, the GBC can manage the object keys of both systems, thus ensuring data

consistency.

   No programming is required to set up the GBC.

  In this example, the information on the connections between the transformer and the GIS is stored in

the GIS. You can call this information from the SAP system.

  You can also map the integration of SAP and GIS using XI (Exchange Infrastructure).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 173/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-23

SAP AG 2009

Work Management: Summary

Service objects simplify and standardize the

processing of service orders.

Service products enable you to offer and sell

services as products.

The service connection workflow is supplied with

SAP Utilities. It contains quotation processing,

order processing and invoicing.

Work Management contains interfaces to various

external systems.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 174/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-24

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 175/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-25

Exercises

Unit: Work Management

Topic: Service Orders

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Perform the front office process Create service order .

You familiarize yourself with service orders and service objects.

1-1 Create a service order using the CIC.

1-1-1 Business partner Elmer Petersheim, in Massachusetts Avenue 0##, 02116

Boston, reports a device malfunction.

Identify the business partner.

Create a service order as a repair order.

In the navigation area on the Environment  tab page, select the dual rate meter

and click on the right mouse button to call the Create repair order  process.

1-1-2 Which order number has been assigned by the system?

 ______________________________________________________

1-1-3 Which work center has been determined?

Which operations are transferred to the service order?

 ______________________________________________________

1-1-4 From where are the work center and operations transferred?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 176/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-26

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 177/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-27

Solutions

Unit: Work Management

Topic: Service Orders

1-1 Create a service order.

Uti l iti es I ndustry Customer Service Front Off ice/Customer I nteraction Center

Customer I nteraction Center  

1-1-1 You use the search function to determine the business partner

 by entering the data and confirming this with Enter .

By choosing Enter  a second time, the customer data will be stored on theEnvironment  tab page.

Expand the structure of Elmer Petersheim’s private account as far as the

dual rate meter and select this.

Click on the right mouse button to start the Create repair order  process.

The service order is created in the background.

Save the customer contact. 

The contacts and service orders are displayed in the navigation area on the

Documents tab page after you have chosen Refresh .

You can display the document by selecting it and choosing Display  (right mouse

click).

Service order number: __________

1-1-2 You can also determine the service order from the clipboard in the navigation

area or from the customer contact on the Business Objects tab page (in each

case, select the service order and click on the right mouse button to display  it).

1-1-3 Display the service order.

The work center is in the service order header.

You can find the operations on the Operations  tab page.

1-1-4 When you call the process you select a service object.

The work center is stored in this service object.

The operations are in the task list.The task list is also stored in the service object.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 178/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 4-28

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 179/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-1

SAP AG 2009

Device Technology

Device Category

Device category data

Integration in the standard SAP system

Device and Register

Device data

Register data

Integration in the standard SAP system

Device History

Device Inspection

Sample lot

Certification

Contents:

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 180/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 181/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-3

SAP AG 2009

Device Technology: Business Scenario

Technical mapping of complex devices andinstallation structures (such as integrated watermeters, instrument panels)

Organization of billing-related data(such as rental prices, meter readings)

Recording of comprehensive device history asthe basis for meter reading, billing, maintenance,and inspection

Device stocks managed on quantity and value

basis

Integration in Materials Management and AssetManagement

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 182/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-4

SAP AG 2009

Device Technology: Device Category

Device Category

Device and Register 

Device History

Device Inspection

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 183/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-5

SAP AG 2009

Device Category, Basic Device Category and Device

=> Specific device data Device number/serial number 

Operation data, such as installation, removalor meter reading

Certification and maintenance data

A device corresponds to a piece of equipmentin the Plant Maintenance component (PM)

=> Features of similar devices

Definition of technical device data

Recording of inspection and certification periods

The device category corresponds to the materialin the Materials Management component (MM)

Basic device cat. => Basic functions of device categories, such as:

Meter  Transformer 

Pressure regulator 

and so on

Device cat. 2

Device cat. 1

Device 3

Device 2

Device 1

 

  Examples of basic device categories:

•  Meters measure consumption

•  Transformers convert electrical voltage, for example

•  ARCRs (audio frequency ripple control receivers) transmit information via the electricity grid by

means of audio frequency modulation

•  Remote meters measure consumption from a distance

•  Counters determine the thermal quantity output with district heating

•  Correctors calculate standard cubic meters from gas values

•  Pressure regulators adjust gas pressure, for example

•  Sensors act as pulse generators, for example, temperature sensors

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 184/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-6

SAP AG 2009

Integration with Logistics

SAP UtilitiesDevice Management

Device Category

Device

Logistics

Material

Equipment

 

  SAP Utilities functions of device management include:

•  Technical data such as the register group, the input/output group, command group, and so on

•  Installation, as well as removal and replacement of devices

•  Installation structure for modeling devices and register relationships, in addition to rate data

•  Organization and execution of meter readings of registers in the service territory

•  Device inspection: Sampling procedure, certification, and periodic replacement

  Integration of SAP Utilities Device Management with the standard ERP Logistics component makes

it possible to use the following:

•  Inventory Management (component MM-IM)

•  Purchasing (MM-PUR component)

•  Warehouse Management (the components MM-IM and MM-WM)

•  Plant Maintenance (the component PM)

•  Class system

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 185/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-7

SAP AG 2009

Device category

The device category groups together devices with the same features (data).

Device categories are managed as materials with a material number in theMaterials Management application component.

Definition of Device Category

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 186/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-8

SAP AG 2008

Device Category Data

MM Data Data Specific to SAP Utilities

Device Category

Planning• Procurement

planning• Calculation• Forecast

Logistics

• Storage• Warehouse management• Transport data

Basic Data

• Material description• Valuation, price

General

• Construction class• Function class• Price class• Device catgy description

Other Datadepending on basic device category

• Register group• Winding group• Input/output group

Certification

• Certification requirement• Certification periods

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 187/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-9

SAP AG 2009

Device Category Elements

MaterialMM

Device CategorySAP Utilities

Input/OutputGroup

RegisterGroup

WindingGroup

Informative

Function-related

 

  Certain functional group elements are required, depending on the basic device category. Examples:

•  Devices belonging to the basic device category METERS must be allocated to a register group.

However, an input/output group may be allocated for technical descriptions of the available

device interfaces, if required.

•  The allocation of a winding group, in which the billing data is recorded, is mandatory for devices

 belonging to the TRANSFORMERS basic device category. An input/output group can also be

maintained for information purposes (for example, for service technicians), if required.

  Data concerning register groups can be arranged according to division category (the reactive

current/active current indicator can only be maintained in the register group of the electricity

division).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 188/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-10

SAP AG 2009

Device Technology: Device and Register 

Device Category

Device and Register 

Device History

Device Inspection

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 189/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-11

SAP AG 2009

A device is an instrument that is used to measure consumption, processdata, or control and protect other instruments.

Devices are managed in the Plant Maintenance (PM) application componentas pieces of equipment with equipment numbers.

Device

Device category

Definition of Devices

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 190/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-12

SAP AG 2009

Device Data

PMSAP

Utilities

Operations• Maintenance plan orders• Service orders• Notifications• Capacity planning

General• Inventory number • Weight/volume• Reference data• Manufacturer data• Stock information

General

• Device cat., basic cat.• Lock status• Change documents• Time slices

Operations• Installation and removal• Modification and disconn.• Certification• Meter reading

Device

• Material no., serial no.

• Equipment type and no.• Status

Header Data

Plant Maintenance• Maintenance plant• Maint. planning plant• Maint. planner group• Resp. work center 

Category-Specific Data• Group data, construct. yr • Manufacturer, cat. desc.• Owner status• Certification data

 

  The device master record is divided into various areas:

•  General data: Technical data, reference data, manufacturer data

•  Serialization data: Internal equipment number, plant, storage location, posting documents

•  SAP Utilities data:

-  Technical data:

Register group, winding group, command group (depending on the basic device category)

-  Certification data / inspection data:

Certification year and status, lot, replacement year, sample device status

-  Operation data:

Installation, removal, modification, disconnection

-  Master data:

Business partner, connection object, device location, location, premise, installations

-  Meter reading results

  When devices are moved (goods receipt, installation), the equipment status is updated (ESTO,

AVLB, INST). The device status informs the user that a particular business process has been

 performed. For example, ESTO means that the device was entered in the system using a goods

receipt posting and is available in a warehouse.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 191/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 192/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-14

SAP AG 2006

Technical data Process data

General

• Register category• Register type (time zone)• Pre-decimal places• Decimal places

Technical• Unit of measurement• Register code, such asreactive or active energy

• Display type

Meter reading• Number of meter readingresults per meter reading

• Indicator: non-meteringregister 

Register relationships

• Register relationship type• Relationship register • Operation code

Meter readings

• Recorded meter reading• Estimated meter reading• Multiple allocation

Meter reading• Reason• Type, meter reader • Date• Status

Register Register 

Sample register relationship

Register Data

Register configuration

 

  Examples of register relationships:

•  Active/reactive relationship

•  Serial switching relationship

•  On-peak/off-peak relationship

•  Control relationship

•  Volume correction factor relationship (thermal gas billing)

•  Volume correction factor calculation (thermal gas billing)

  You can assign individual validations to each register relationship to check the meter reading results.

Example: Meter reading results from two registers that are connected by a control relationship canonly differ by a maximum of 1%. If this tolerance is exceeded, the meter reading result is not

accepted and is assigned the status "implausible".

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 193/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-15

SAP AG 2009

Device Technology: Device History

Device Category

Device and Register 

Device History

Device Inspection

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 194/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-16

SAP AG 2009

Device History

Removal/Replacement

Installation

GoodsReceipt

StockTransfer 

Purchase

Order 

InspectionCertificationReprogramming

GoodsIssue

MM

SAPUtilities

Device Management- Installation

Retirement

PM

Purchase

Requisition

 

  Devices are created in an integrated system using the Purchasing  (MM-PUR), Inventory

 Management  (MM-IM) and Plant Maintenance (PM) components.

•  Devices are created as serialized pieces of equipment in the system by posting a goods receipt

for any number of devices of a particular device category.

•  The entire goods procurement process can be performed in an optional first step (purchase

requisition, purchase order, and so on).

•  A prerequisite is that the device category has already been created and therefore exists as a

material. The serial number profile in the material master ensures that the devices to be created

are supplied with the necessary SAP Utilities data.

 If the Materials Management  (MM) component is not used, you can also create devices directly inSAP Utilities. The inventory management function is not supported here, however.

  Although device installation is performed within SAP Utilities, it is based on enhanced functions of

the Plant Maintenance component (PM).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 195/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-17

SAP AG 2009

Device History Documentation

MMMM

Purchasing: Purchase orders, inquiry/quotation, outline agreement Warehouse logistics: Transport, inventory, transfer posting Inventory management: Goods movement, reservation Valuation, inventory, planning

PMPM

Maintenance: Technical objects and equipment Work planning, maintenance planning Maintenance processing

CSCS

Service contracts: Contracts, maintenance plans Service processing: Notification, order, confirmation Service planning: Terminate, task lists

Device specification: Device category, device Installation: Installation, removal, replacement, installation structure Meter reading: Organization, meter reading order, meter reading

result entry Inspection and certification: Periodic or sampling procedure

SAPUT

SAPUT

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 196/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 197/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-19

SAP AG 2009

Definition of Certification Procedure

With external certification, a device is inspected by astate inspection authority. If a device passes aninspection according to the prescribed margins of error,the device is certified for the calibration validity period.

With internal certification, the utility companyvoluntarily inspects a device according to companystandards. When the internal certification period expires,the device is inspected again in accordance with thecompany's criteria and the certification is renewed.

In the certification procedure, you can either inspect alldevices or a sample of devices.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 198/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-20

SAP AG 2009

Certification Procedure

Description:

Only a representative sampleof all devices is removed forinspection and replaced.

Procedure:

Create lot

Compile lot

Determine lot devices

Perform first drawing

Replacement orders arecreated automatically

Check

Description:

Devices due for certification areremoved completely andreplaced by identical devices.

Procedure:

Create periodic replacementlist

Select the device categories

Create list indialog or batch

Replacement orders are

created automatically

Periodicreplacement

SAP

UT

Sample

Certificationof Devices

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 199/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 200/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-22

SAP AG 2003

Create lotCreate lot Compile lotCompile lot Determine

lot devices

Determine

lot devices

Perform 1st

drawing

Perform 1st

drawing

Certify sample

devices

Certify sample

devices

Break up

lot

Break up

lot

Transfer devicesto periodic file

Transfer devicesto periodic file

Inspectsampledevices

Inspectsampledevices

Perform1st

drawing

Perform1st

drawing

Renew lotRenew lot

 YesNo Inspection

passed?? ??

Inspection Using the Sampling Procedure

 

  The flow chart displays the typical sample lot procedure. Some steps may be carried out differently

depending on the configuration of the Customizing tables (for example, a second drawing is

normally not possible).

  If necessary, you can use the standard R/3 component quality management (PM-QM) to organize

and manage the test data. This component contains comprehensive functions for organizing test

rules, test transactions and test results.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 201/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 202/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-24

SAP AG 2003

The device category divides devices into functional

groups and specifies their features. The devicecategory corresponds to the material in MM.

The device is a measuring instrument that"inherits" the features of the device category.These "inherited " features can be enhanced byindividual specifications, if required.

Integration in the PM and MM applicationcomponents allows you to completely process allservice and logistics functions.

Devices are certified and inspected for internal andexternal purposes by means of periodicreplacement and sampling procedures.

Device Technology: Unit Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 203/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 204/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-26

1-2 Display all devices for customer TB010110##  and select the double rate meter for

electricity.

1-2-1 When is the device due for certification again?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-2 Is the device already in a lot?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-3 Has the device already been drawn as a sample device?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-4 How long is the calibration validity?How long is the internal certification period?

 _____________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-3 Specify the connection data for the device TB010110## . 

1-3-1 What is the current connection object?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-3-2 What is the current device location?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-3-3 Display the structure graphic and describe the procedure.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 205/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 206/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-28

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 207/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-29

Solutions

Unit: Device Management Technology

Topic: Creating and Delivering Devices

1-1

1-1-1 Select the customer in the CIC.

Select the node for the Water contract and click to expand the subnode.

Double-click on the node for Water meter, device TB010120## .

The device category is displayed on the I S Data  tab page.

Do not exit this screen.

1-1-2 The MR Results button lists all the meter reading results.

The F1 help provides information for the individual columns.

The F4 help displays the meaning of the individual keys.

Return to the device display.

1-1-3 You are located in the device display for TB010120## . On the Group Data tab page, double-click on the Register Group  field.

The system displays the master data for the register group.

Here you can see the number of registers as well as their technical specifications

Click on the back arrow to return to theCIC

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 208/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 209/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-31

1-3 In the I S Data  view, choose the Master Data  tab page.

1-3-1 The current connection object is TB010110## .

1-3-2 The current device location is TB010111DL0## .

1-3-3 From the menu, choose Structure   Structure Graphic.

Answer the question Expand structure upwards? with Yes.

You can expand the structure further using the Levels above button.The current connection object is TB010110## .

1-4

•  Determine the device category for the device TB010110## .

•  Open a new session. From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose:

Logistics Mater ials Management Mater ial Master

Materi al Display Display Curr ent  

•  Enter the key for the material/device category.

•  Select all views and confirm the entry.

•  Since materials are always defined for a specific plant, you

must also specify the plant U001.

1-5

1-5-1 True.

IS-U device technology is integrated in the components MM, PM and CS.

1-5-2 False.

Devices are based on a device category, which in turn consists of one or more

 basic device categories.

1-5-3 True. 

1-5-4 True.

The device category is managed in the component MM with the material

number.

1-5-5 False.

Although the register group is allocated to the device category, it is not onlyused for information purposes, but also has functional tasks when processing

and checking meter reading results.

•  Validation of the number of figures

•  Meter overflow

•  Conversion of results depending on the transformation ratio

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 210/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 5-32

1-5-6 True.

The device is managed in PM using the equipment number.

1-5-7 False.

Devices can only be allocated to one lot.

1-5-8 False.

In addition to the sampling procedure, the periodic replacement procedure canalso be used.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 211/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-1

SAP AG 2009

Device Installation

Installation / removal / replacement

Technical installation / removal / replacement

Billing-related installation / removal

Installation structure

Rate data

Device allocations

Register relationships

Contents:

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 212/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-2

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe and perform device installation, removal,and replacement. You will also be able to describehow these functions are integrated with the ServiceManagement (SM) application component.

Explain the relationship between the connectionobject, the device location, and the device, and howthey are integrated in the Plant Maintenance (PM)application component.

Display devices of an installation and describe theinstallation structure.

Device Installation: Unit Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 213/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-3

SAP AG 2003

Device installation if replaced periodically

Create and plan service orders

Execute service orders: Remove old devices andinstall new ones (device replacement)

Device Installation: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 214/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-4

SAP AG 2009

Device Installation: Installation / Removal /Replacement

Installation / removal / replacement

Installation structure

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 215/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-5

SAP AG 2006

Creation of work ordersto replace

the relevant

devices

Creation of work ordersto replace

the relevantdevices

Team leader of 

f ie ld sales forc e 

Field sales forc e 

employee 

On-site technicalexecution of the

order andconfirmation ofcompleting the

order in the system

On-site technicalexecution of the

order andconfirmation ofcompleting the

order in the system

Team leader of 

f ie ld sales force 

Changes to datain the system("full device

replacement")

Changes to datain the system("full device

replacement")

Agent Device insp ect ion

Technical closingof the service

order andtriggering of the

invoice

Technical closingof the service

order andtriggering of the

invoice

Sampledevices in alot must bereplaced forcertification

Sampledevices in alot must bereplaced forcertification

Planningthe

work orders

Planningthe

work orders

Business Scenario: Replacing Sample Devices

Agent 

Device insp ect ion

  Devices of a particular device category are due for certification. After the sample devices have been

determined using the lot procedure, the corresponding work orders are automatically generated for

the removal of these devices.

The work orders contain a complete description of the process, as well as a list of materials and

resources that may be needed.

  The work orders are then scheduled for execution, taking resource capacities and deadlines into

account.

  In the next step, the work order is executed on-site according to the process description: the old

device is removed and is replaced by a new device of the same category.

  As soon as the work order is executed, it is documented accordingly in the system by means of a

completion confirmation.

  Once the completion certification has been successfully generated, the device replacement is carried

out in the system and the order can be closed and invoiced, if necessary.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 216/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-6

SAP AG 2009

Service Order: Determine Device Location

The device location describes where a device is installed in the

connection object.

The address of the connection object links the device location to the

regional structure.

The location can be specified in more detail using location data,

location details, and a long text. The service order is used to forward

this information together with the address data to the field employee.

The device location is a

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

functional location in the PM application

component.

The structure of the functional locations and the equipment (devices)

installed provides a comprehensive overview of the technical

systems installed.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 217/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-7

SAP AG 2003

Connectionobject

Devicelocation

Device

The device location is the location in theconnection object that is independent of adivision and in which any number of devicescan technically be installed.

Definition of the Device Location

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 218/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-8

SAP AG 2003

Devicelocation

Reference to premise

• The device location canbe allocated to apremise if required

Integration with PM

• The device location isdefined as a functionallocation below theconnection object

Independent of division

• Installation location for devices of all divisions

• Installation location for all device categories

Location data

• Exact location and locationsupplement

• Long text• Link to regional structure

Device Location Data

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 219/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-9

SAP AG 2009

Placement of the Device Location in the PMStructure

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

PM ObjectsSAP Utilities Objects

Device LocationLower-level

Functional Location

Connection Object

Equipment

Connection

Legend

Installation of equipmentHierarchical relationship between functionallocations

Device

Higher-level

Functional Location

Equipment

Device

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 220/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-10

SAP AG 2009

Service Order: Device Replacement andConfirmation

M e t e r  n o :  3 2 4 5 6 1 

M e t e r  n o :  3 2 4 5 6 1 

R e a d i n g :   _ _ _ _ _ _

R e a d i n g :   _ _ _ _ _ _

The field employee performs an on-sitemeter reading for the sample device andthen physically removes the device.

The new device is installed in the devicelocation. Since the new device has toperform the tasks and functions of the olddevice, it must have the same technicalfeatures.

A function test is performed and new meterreadings are taken as a basis for billing.

This concludes the technical aspect of theservice order and the field employee entersthe corresponding confirmation in thesystem.

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

Confirmserviceorder 

Serviceorder 

executed

Replacedevice

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 221/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-11

SAP AG 2003

The Back Office employee responsible receives the completionconfirmation for the service order in electronic or paper form. Thecompletion confirmation contains all the central information for any datachanges required in the system.

The customer service representative can locate the installation affectedusing the device number of the device removed and start the "Fullreplacement" transaction using the following data:

Device location

Installation

Activity date

Device number of the sample device

Device number of the new device

Data Changes: Installation Location

ChangeSystemsystem

Locateinstallation

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

Serviceorder order 

Serviceorder 

executed

Devicedevice

carry out

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 222/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-12

SAP AG 2003

Executedevice

replacement

Datachange

completed

The customer service representative enters the meter reading from thedevice removed and the meter reading at installation of the new device.This ensures that there are no gaps in the consumption history, whichprovides the basis for billing.

Once the data has been saved, the device replacement is complete.

Data Changes: Device Replacement

ChangeSystem

Locateinstallation

Executeserviceorder 

Determinedevice location

Serviceorder 

Serviceorder 

executed

Executedevice

replacement

 

  The following steps are performed automatically in the background for a device replacement:

•  Billing-related removal of the old device: This terminates the business relationship between the

device and the business partner's installation (and therefore the contract).

•  Technical removal of the old device: This removes the link to the device location, (and therefore

to the connection object). All existing register relationships are terminated and the current time

slice for the device is removed. At the same time, a new time slice begins. The status in the

device master record is changed from EEGB (equipment installed) to EFRE (equipment free).

•  Technical installation of the new device: The connection of the new register to the device

location (and therefore the connection object) is established. The device receives the status

EEGB. At the same time, a new time slice is opened for the device, beginning on the installation

date. Any register relationships are transferred from the old device to the new meter.

•  Billing-related installation of the new device: The new device is connected to the business

master data (installation, contract, business partner). Data that is relevant to rates (such as the rule

for determining the clearing price, rate data at device and register level, information about

extrapolation of consumption values) is transferred to the new device.

  Processing steps that are performed automatically for a device replacement can also be performed

separately (for instance by different customer service representatives). Individual transactions, such

as technical installation, billing-related installation, and full installation (= both steps in one

transaction) can be used to perform each step of the installation and removal processes separately.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 223/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-13

SAP AG 2003

Businesspartner 

Businesspartner 

Contractaccount

Contractaccount

Installation1

Installation1

Installation2

Installation2

Contract 2(Company code 2)

Waste water 

Contract 2(Company code 2)

Waste water 

Contract 1(Company code 1)

Fresh water 

Contract 1(Company code 1)

Fresh water 

PremisePremise

Devicelocation

Devicelocation

Connectionobject

Connectionobject

Device 1

Billing-r elated

installation

Billing-related

installation

Technicalinstallation

Technical and Billing-Related Installation

 

  Devices can be allocated to several installations from a billing perspective (billing-related

installation). However, each device can be allocated to only one device location from a technical

 point of view (technical installation).

  Since one contract exists per installation, a separate installation in the relevant division is created for

each contract. Accordingly, any meters installed are allocated twice from the point of view of

 billing.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 224/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-14

SAP AG 2009

Device Installation: Installation Structure

Installation / removal / replacement

Installation structure

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 225/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-15

SAP AG 2009

Installation Structure: Example

Supplygrid

Street

Audio frequency ripple control receiver 

Device allocationRegister relationship

Electricity

Serial switching

 

  The installation structure comprises all technical and billing-related data for a utility contract.

  In the example above, switching between the two rates of the double-rate electricity meter is

controlled by an audio frequency ripple control receiver. For information purposes, this is mapped in

the system as an ARCR type device allocation. At the same time, one of the registers of the double-

rate electricity meter has a serial switching relationship with another register. The consumption of

the serial switching register (secondary register) is automatically deducted from the consumption of

the main register during the billing run.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 226/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-16

SAP AG 2009

Technical Structure of Installation

Device allocations

Audio frequency ripplecontrol receiver 

Transformer 

Pressure regulator 

Customer-specificallocations

Register relationships

Reactive/activerelationship

Serial switchingrelationship

On-peak/off-peakrelationship

Control relationship

VCF relationship

Relationship forcalculating volumecorrection factor 

Customer-specificrelationships

 

  Device allocations describe relationships between installed devices. A device allocation is always

composed of a controlling and a controlled device

(Example: A calculation factor, which is included in consumption billing, is defined at register level

for the "transformer" allocation type).

  Register relationships:

•  In a reactive/active relationship, all active registers and all reactive registers of the same

register category are added together, and the total is used to carry out the cosine phi examination.

•  The serial switching relationship determines consumption and is relevant for billing.

•  The on-peak/off-peak relationship describes the relationship between registers with different

register types (for example, on-peak and off-peak registers).•  In a control relationship, all registers are added and the totals compared with the designated

control register.

•  You need the VCF relationship (gas division only) for billing difference quantities resulting

from different meter readings for the operating volume meter of the corrector and an additional

external operating volume meter.

•  You need the VCF calculation relationship (gas division only) for billing difference quantities

resulting from different meter readings for the operating cubic meter meter of the corrector and

an additional external operating cubic meter meter.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 227/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-17

SAP AG 2009

Billing-Related Installation Structure

Rate Data

Relevance torental price

Relevance to billing

Price class

Rate type

Rate fact group

Discount

Extrapolation data

Expected periodconsumption

Fixed consumptionvalues for linearweighting(absolute / relative)

 

  You determine the rate and extrapolation data when you maintain the device installation.

These can be changed at any time later from "Installation Structure" in the menu.

•  The Relevance to rental price indicator determines whether a rental price is charged.

•  The Relevance to billing indicator at register level determines that a

 plausible meter reading result is expected for billing.

•  The price class is maintained at device category, device, or register level.

Together with the price level, it determines the rental price from the rate.

•  The rate type is maintained at device or register level.

Together with the rate category for the installation, it controls rate determination.

•  The rate fact group is also maintained at device or register level.It contains specific values (for example, constants) and/or keys (for example, price keys).

•  The discount for quantities and services is maintained at register level (register discount).

  Period consumption is used in the extrapolation of meter readings when no representative meter

reading results are available (such as for new customers).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 228/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-18

SAP AG 2008

Device Installation: Summary

The precise location of the devices is found using

device location in SAP Utilities. The device location

is a functional location in the PM component.

Devices can be installed or removed in two separate

steps that are distinguished in terms of technical

and billing factors. Devices can also be installed or

removed in one step for both billing and technical

data.

During device replacement, full removal of the old

device and full installation of the new device is

carried out in one step.

In this way, technical and billing-related data is

automatically transferred from the old device to the

new device.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 229/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-19

Exercises

Unit: Device Management Installation

Topic: Installation and Removal of Devices

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Display all the devices in an installation

•  Install and remove devices

•  Explain integration with the PM component

A customer’s water meter is faulty and must be replaced. To replace thedevice, the following steps are performed in the system:

•  Billing-related removal of the faulty device from the installation and

technical removal from the device location.

•  Technical and billing-related installation of the new meter.

A customer’s water meter is faulty and must be replaced. To replace the

device, the following steps are performed in the system:

•  Billing-related removal of the faulty device from the installation and

technical removal from the device location.

•  Technical and billing-related installation of the new meter.

1-1 The water meter TB010120##  for customer TB010110##  was faulty. A field employee

replaced the faulty device with a new device that has the same technical features.

As the responsible office-based employee, you first perform a full removal of the old

device and then a full installation of the new device in the system.

Note:  This operation can be processed quickly in one step using the device replacement

transaction. In this transaction, the system carries out the full removal and installation

automatically in the background. However, in order to illustrate the individual steps in

this task, you should carry out the device replacement step by step.  

1-1-1 First, using the CIC, determine the device location and installation to which the

device is assigned.

1-1-2 Call Device Management in one session.

Remove the device TB010120##  in one step with today's date. Enter an

appropriate removal reason and estimate the meter readings.

1-1-3 Then install the new meter TB010200##  in one step.

Choose today's date as the installation date.

Enter a meter reading at installation of 97.8 m³ for the register.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 230/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-20

Assign a rate type, fact group, and period consumption to the register. Enter an

appropriate installation reason.

1-1-4 Finally, use the data environment display for the customer in the IC to check the

device replacement in the utility installation.

1-2 Check the following features of the device you have just installed.

1-2-1 Installation date and installation reason:

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-2 Meter reading at installation:

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-3 The current business partner:

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-4 The device manufacturer:

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-5 Maintenance planning plant:

 _____________________________________________________

1-3 Display the structure graphic for the functional locations and their equipment for the

newly installed device and complete the installation in the device location.

1-4 True or false?

1-4-1 During technical installation, the device is allocated to a device location and an

installation. You cannot maintain rate data.

On the other hand, you can create, search for, and change device locations.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-2 Only devices from the same division can be installed in a device location.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-3 You always have to maintain billing-relevant rate data when installing a device.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-4 The device location is managed as a functional location in PM.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-5 The device location is the highest level in the functional location hierarchy in

PM.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-6 The installation and removal of devices automatically generates a time slice for

the device.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-7 A device can be installed into several installations.

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 231/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 232/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-22

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 233/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 234/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 235/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-25

1-4 True or false?

1-4-1 False.

You cannot create device locations during installation.

1-4-2 False.

The device location is a device installation location in the connection object thatis not dependent on a division.

The device location can be assigned to a premise, if desired.

1-4-3 False.

The rate data relevant to billing is not required during technical installation. It can

 be added during billing-related installation or full installation.

1-4-4 True.

1-4-5 False.

The connection object represents the level above the device location in the

hierarchy.1-4-6 True.

1-4-7 True.

2 Create device allocation: 

Call transaction EG31 fu ll i nstallation .

In device location TB010111DL0##  and installation TB010110## ,

install the ARCR  508010##  with today's date.

Save the device installation.Call the transaction EG31 fu ll i nstallation  again.

In device location TB010111DL0##  and installation TB010110## ,

install the double rate meter 5040##  with today's date.

The system then automatically proposes the TRE you installed previously. Now maintain

the data relevant for billing:

Recorded meter reading: Register 1: 0  and register 2: 0 

Period consumption: Register 1: 2000  and register 2: 1000 

Rate type: Register 1: on-peak   and register 2: off-peak  

Fact groups: Residential customers

Activate the Pay rental price function for the on-peak register.

Save the device installation.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 236/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 6-26

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 237/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-1

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading

Contents:

Meter Reading Organization

Scheduling

Street Route

Meter Reading Process

Meter Reading Order 

Meter Reading Result

Monitoring

Special Meter Reading Functions

Meter Reading by Customers via the Internet

Reversal

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 238/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-2

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the meter reading procedure

Scheduling and street route

Meter reading processing

Enter meter reading results by means of:

Automatic and manual payment run

Single and mass entry

Single and mass estimation

Meter reading correction

Meter Reading: Unit Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 239/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-3

SAP AG 2003

A customer telephones the customer call center toreport his/her move-out

The customer service agent enters the move-out dateand the meter readings

An implausible reading means that the utilitycompany has to carry out a control reading

Meter reading processing

Creation of meter reading order 

Enter or estimate meter reading results

Start of billing and invoicing

Final billing, followed by invoicing

Meter Reading: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 240/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-4

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading: Organization

Meter Reading Organization Scheduling

Street route

Meter Reading Process

Meter reading order 

Meter reading result

Monitoring

Special Meter Reading Functions Meter reading by customers via the

Internet

Reversal

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 241/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-5

SAP AG 2003

UnscheduledScheduled

Indicator 

Predefined meter reading

strategy

Date and area scheduled inregional structure

Resources can be planned

Process

Create meter readingschedule

Specify meter readingsequence

Create mass meter readingorders

Enter results

Check results

Release for billing

Indicator 

There are special reasons for

the meter reading request,such as a move-in/out

Date and area cannot bescheduled

Meter reading cannot beplanned

Process

Create a single meter readingorder 

Enter consumption

Check results

Release for billing

Types of Meter Reading

Meterreading

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 242/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-6

SAP AG 2009

Scheduling and Regional Structure

Regional Structure SchedulingMaster Data

MR

unit

Businesspartner 

Connectionobject

Premise

Account

Installation

Contract

City StreetStreet

section

Politicalstructure

PortionPostal Regional Structure

 

  Scheduling is managed in the meter reading unit and portion objects.

  Scheduling:

•  Control meter reading

•  Control periodic billing

•  Control budget billing collection

  Portion:

Grouping of contracts that are to be billed together.

You allocate a contract to a portion either directly in the contract or indirectly via

the meter reading unit entered in the installation in the contract.

  Meter reading unit:

A meter reading unit groups together installations (and the devices and registers installed in them)

according to regional criteria for meter reading purposes.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 243/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-7

SAP AG 2009

Scheduling Tasks

MR unit 3

MR unit 2

MR unit 1

Portion 2

Portion 1

  Grouping of contracts

For joint billing

with same control for budget billing amounts

Budget billing cycle

Budget billing scheduling

Grouping of utility installations

For joint billing

of specific billing classes and divisions Control of special features of meter reading

MDE download

Intervals

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 244/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 245/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-9

SAP AG 2009

Scheduling: Generation of Schedule Records

Generation of schedule recordsPortion

P_AUG01

MR unitA_AUG01

P1

Parameter record

Schedule Master Records

etc.

A_AUG01 2007

A_AUG01 2006

MR unitSchedule Records

etc.

P_AUG01 2007

P_AUG01 2006

Portion

 

  Schedule records are generated from the entries in the parameter record and schedule master records

(portion and meter reading unit).

  Schedule records refer to specific dates. They control meter reading and billing.

  Schedule records must be generated for portions and meter reading units before meter reading orders

can be generated.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 246/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-10

SAP AG 2006

20062006

Portion A

27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7. 1.8. 2.8. 3.8.

Portion A

27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7. 1.8. 2.8. 3.8.

20072007

Portion A

27.7. 28.7. 29.7. 30.7. 31.7. 1.8. 2.8. 3.8.

Scheduledmeterreadingdate

Billing periodBilling period

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 1

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 2

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 3

for all meter reading unfor all meter reading unitsits

Endof meterreadingperiod

Endof meterreadingperiod

Endbilling

period

Meter reading

BillingBilling

Meter reading

BillingBilling

Scheduling: Annual Billing

Scheduled billing date

 

  End of billing period: This is the date on which the portion is to be billed for the first time. This

date, together with the length of the billing period (that is, the period length), determines the date of

the next billing (start of the next billing period = end of the billing period + 1 day).

  The scheduled billing date is the date on which the contracts belonging to a portion are billed. This

takes the SAP calendar into account.

  The end of the meter reading period corresponds to the end of the billing period, and is used as a

 basis for defining dates of subsequent meter reading periods.

  The scheduled meter reading date is the date on which the schedule specifies the register is to be

read. It is also the date for which periodic meter readings are generated in scheduling. It forms the

 basis for calculating the expected consumption during meter reading order creation; it also acts asthe final date for determining the budget billing amount.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 247/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-11

SAP AG 2009

Scheduling: Monthly Billing

July

Portion 1

27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 1. 2. 3.

Portion 1

27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 1. 2. 3.

August

Portion 1

27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 1. 2. 3.

Targetreadingdate

Billing periodBilling period

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 1Meter reading period for meter reading unit 1

Meter reading period for MR unit 2Meter reading period for MR unit 2

End of meter readingperiod

End of billing

period

Target billing date

Meter reading period for meter reading unit 2Meter reading period for meter reading unit 2

for meter reading unitsfor meter reading units

Meter reading

Billing

Meter reading

Billing

 

  To generate schedule records for the above, the following settings are required: 

•  Portion: 

-  End of billing period: August 3

-  Target billing date: August 1

-  Period length: 1 month

•  Meter reading units: 

-  End of meter reading period*: July 31

* When the meter reading unit is created, the end of the meter reading period is automatically

adjusted to correspond to the end of the billing period.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 248/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-12

SAP AG 2009

MRunit

A

S t r  e e t  R o u t e 

Street Route

District 1

Street 1

Street 2

Street n

District 2

District n

Device 1

Device 2

Device n

Device loc.1

Device loc.n

Device loc.2

Connectionobject 1

Connectionobject 2

Connectionobject n

254.1247.02254.1247.02

 

  You can use this component to determine the sequence in which devices in a service territory are

read. This enables you plan the optimum route for the meter reader.

  You make specifications in a meter reading unit according to the following criteria:

•  City

•  Street

•  House number (connection object)

•  Device location

•  Device

  You can maintain the street route for a single meter reading unit or create a combined street route for

several meter reading units. The prerequisite for a combined street route for several meter reading

units is the joint allocation of different meter reading units in the corresponding scheduling master

records.

  The enhancement EDMLSORT (sorting of meter reading orders for printout and download) can be

used for the street route.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 249/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-13

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading: Process

Meter Reading Organization

Scheduling

Street route

Meter Reading Process

Meter reading order 

Meter reading result

Monitoring

Special Meter Reading Functions

Meter reading by customers via theInternet

Reversal

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 250/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-14

SAP AG 2009

Planned Meter Reading Procedure

Date for meter reading

reached

Createmeter reading

orders

Outputmeter reading

orders

Printmeter reading

orders

Downloadmeter reading

data

Performmeter reading

Performmeter reading

Enter 

meter readingresults

Upload

meter readingresults

Checkmeter reading

results

Manualmeter reading

due

MDEreading

due

MRresults

determined

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 251/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-15

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading Order Creation

Date for meter reading

reached

Createmeter reading

orders

Outputmeter reading

orders

Printmeter reading

orders

Downloadmeter reading

data

Performmeter reading

Performmeter reading

Enter 

meter readingresults

Upload

meter readingresults

Checkmeter reading

results

Manualmeter reading

due

MDEreading

due

MRresults

determined

Meter Reading Order 

Individual order  Mass order 

Individual Order Data

Selection using the meter reading unit,contract, installation, and device

Additional dates for billing control

Mass Order Data

Selection using From meter reading unit and

To meter reading unit

Schedule task in task management

Specification of Meter Reading Reason

 

  You can influence order creation using three control IDs:

•  Include meter reading category schedule record

-  If you select this field, the planned meter reading category for the schedule record has

 priority. This enables you to prepare meter readings by customers, providing the schedule

record allows this.

•  Meter reading interval check

-  If you select this field, the system checks whether a meter reading order or meter reading

result already exists in the meter reading interval. If it does, the system suppresses the meter

reading order with the lower reading reason priority.

-  Deselecting this field speeds up meter reading order creation. The order is always created,

even if you have defined meter reading reason priorities for interval checks in Customizing.

•  Ignore contracts

-  If you select this field and then create billing-relevant meter reading orders again, contracts

that have already had meter reading orders created for them are not analyzed or checked again

 by the system to see if they are complete. This speeds up the process of recreating meter

reading orders.

•  Suppress service orders / notifications

-  If you select this field, the system suppresses the creation of service orders that are

automatically created as a result of Customizing settings.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 252/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-16

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading Order Output

• Cover page• MR documents

MDE • MR announcement• Card for meter reading by customer 

Output media

Meter reading information (selection)

Expected reading with area

Any number of previous meter readingresults

Street route

Notes for the meter reader(dynamic / static)

Date for meter reading

reached

Createmeter reading

orders

Outputmeter reading

orders

Printmeter reading

orders

Downloadmeter reading

data

Performmeter reading

Performmeter reading

Enter meter reading

results

Uploadmeter reading

results

Checkmeter reading

results

Manualmeter reading

due

MDEreading

due

MRresults

determined

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 253/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-17

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading Result Entry

Automatic

Upload interface

Automatic estimation

Manual

Fast entry

Fast entry without correction

Fast entry with correction

Single entry

Result correction

Plausible results

Implausible results

Meter reading by customer 

Via the Internet

Via WAP telephone

Date for meter reading

reached

Createmeter reading

orders

Outputmeter reading

orders

Printmeter reading

orders

Downloadmeter reading

data

Performmeter reading

Performmeter reading

Upload

meter readingresults

Checkmeter reading

results

Manualmeter reading

due

MDEreading

due

MRresults

determined

Enter 

meter readingresults

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 254/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-18

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading Result Data

Reference to meter readingorder with fast entry

Entry number 

Check digit

MR data

Recorded meter reading

Date and time of meter reading

Note from meter reader 

Meter reading type(for example, by utility company, by customer,estimation)

Meter reader number 

Date and time of maximum meter reading

Functions

Correction and release of meter reading result

Estimation of meter reading result

Date for meter reading

reached

Createmeter reading

orders

Outputmeter reading

orders

Printmeter reading

orders

Downloadmeter reading

data

Performmeter reading

Performmeter reading

Upload

meter readingresults

Checkmeter reading

results

Manualmeter reading

due

MDEreading

due

MRresults

determined

Enter 

meter readingresults

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 255/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 256/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-20

SAP AG 2009

Process of Checking Meter Reading Results

Checks can be configured for individual customers and customer groups

Permitted deviations between measured values and target values can be configuredusing tables

Tracking/monitoring of implausible results

For example Consumption from

previous period Demand from previous

periods Demand compared

with agreed max.

For example Cosine phi for

energy/demand Usage hours Control meters

Device: 4711000

Meter reading: 78133

ResultPlausible

ResultImplausible

Correction Aids

Independent

Checks

Dependent

Checks

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 257/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-21

SAP AG 2009

Monitoring

Selection of meter reading orders using the following

data objects:

Contract

Installation

Device

Portion

Meter reading unit

Business partner 

Display (single or all):

Billing order 

Meter reading order 

Meter reading result

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 258/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-22

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading: Special Functions

Meter Reading Organization Scheduling

Street route

Meter Reading Process

Meter reading order 

Meter reading result

Monitoring

Special Meter Reading Functions

Meter reading by customers via the Internet

Reversal

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 259/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 260/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-24

SAP AG 2008

Meter Reading by Customer over WAP Telephone

Customer Customer 

Meterreading

SAPUT

SAPSAPUTUT

Wireless ApplicationProtocol

Wireless ApplicationProtocol Energy supplier Energy supplier Internet customer Internet customer 

W   A   P   

T    r   a  n  s  f    e  r   

m  e  t   e  r    r   e  a  d    i    n   g   s   SAP

BCM

SAPBCM

 

  SAP Business Communication Management

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 261/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-25

SAP AG 2009

Meter Reading Reversal

New meter  reading order 

Reverse meterreading order 

Correctselection

Startmeter readingorder creation

again

Incorrectmass

selection

Incorrectindividualselection Meter reading

order deleted

 

  When a meter reading is reversed, all objects that were generated by the meter reading order

creation and meter reading result entry are deleted:

•  Meter reading orders

•  Meter reading results (optional)

•  Billing orders

  A reversal is necessary, for example, if you realize that the specifications from scheduling were

incorrect after periodic meter reading orders have been created for a meter reading unit,

or if you entered the wrong device when creating a control meter reading order.

  On the initial screen, you can specify whether the meter reading results

•  are to be deleted:

-  this means that new meter reading orders are created for all devices when you recreate a meter

reading order.

•  are not to be deleted:

-  this means that when you recreate a meter reading order, meter reading orders are only

created for devices that have not been read. If a device has already been read, the

corresponding meter reading results are included.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 262/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-26

SAP AG 2003

Scheduled meter readings are controlled via meter reading

units

In meter reading preparation, documents are created for:

Meter reading by the company via meter reading lists

Meter reading by the company via MDE

Meter reading by customer via meter reading cards

Meter Reading by Customers over the Internet

Meter reading processing includes:

Automatic upload of data from external systems

Manual fast entry with and without correction

Manual single entry and meter reading estimation

Configurable validations reduce the potential for error 

Meter Reading: Unit Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 263/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-27

Exercises

Unit: Meter Reading

Topic: Meter Reading for Individual Customers

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Describe the organization and the process of meter reading

•  Carry out single entry of meter reading results

With periodic meter reading, the company does not read the

meters at all installations itself. For some customers, reading the

meters themselves is an efficient use of resources.

The customer reports the meter readings either in writing or by

 phone. An agent records the meter readings made by customers

and enters them manually in the system.

1-1 Which meter reading units are contained in the portion T-A-00 (annual) or (T-C-00

(monthly)?

1-2 To which objects can the portion be directly or indirectly allocated?

1-3 Your business partner TB090110##  would like interim contract billing.

You use the IC to read the meters for all the allocated devices.

1-4 True or false?

1-4-1 The meter reading order controls the meter reading, billing, and invoicing

 processes.

1-4-2 The meter reading order can be output by printer or IDOC.

1-4-3 Meter reading results can be entered manually or automatically and are then

subject to the same validations.

1-4-4 If meter reading results are not available, the meter reading unit cannot be

 billed.

1-4-5 Validations are always carried out.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 264/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-28

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 265/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-29

Solutions

Unit: Meter Reading

Topic: Meter Reading for Individual Customers

1-1 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry   Schedul ing Schedule Master Record Portion  Display  

1-1-1 Enter the portion T-A-00 (annual) or T-C-00 (monthly).. 

1-1-2 Choose Enter . 

1-1-3 The planned billing date is stored in the Sched Bil li ng Date  field. This is valid

for all meter reading units allocated to this portion.

1-1-4 You can view the list of the allocated meter reading units by choosing the

Where-Used Li st. 

1-1-5 By expanding the Portion in MR units  subdirectory, you can view all the meter

reading units that belong to this portion.

1-2 The following relationships can exist:

1-2-1 The portion is entered directly in the meter reading unit

1-2-2 The portion is entered as an alternative portion directly in the contract

1-2-3 The portion is indirectly referenced via the meter reading unit in the installation

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 266/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 7-30

1-3 To enter meter readings, proceed as follows:

1-3-1 Call the IC, and from here, the data for your business partner TB090110## .

Keep choosing Enter  until the data is displayed in the navigation area.

Perform the following steps for each utility contract.

1-3-2 To enter the meter readings for each contract, proceed as follows:

•  Click once on a utility contract to select it.

•  Choose Enter customer meter reading .

•  Confirm the defaults for: 

-  Meter reading reason 02 I nterim reading with bill ing  

-  Meter reading type 02 Meter reading by customer  

•  Choose Continue (F8 ) or the button.

•  Enter the meter readings - even implausible values (very low/very high).

1-3-3 To correct meter readings, proceed as follows:

•  Select a register line.

•  Choose Correct.

•  You can see the expected value on the Forecast Data  tab page in the Meter

Reading Data  and Consumption Data  fields.

•  The reading can be corrected in the Current MR  field.

•  To release the meter reading, choose Release .

1-3-4 You return to meter reading entry:

  Save the meter readings.•  Complete the customer contact and save it.

1-3-5 You return to the IC.

1-3-6 Repeat the steps for the other utility contracts.

1-4

1-4-1 False.

The meter reading order is an organizational aid for preparing meter readings,

collecting data, and creating the meter reading documents.

1-4-2 True.

1-4-3 True.

1-4-4 False.

Missing meter reading results can be estimated by mass runs.

1-4-5 True.

There are fixed validations that are always checked, such as implausible previous

meter reading results, deviations where the installation is inactive or

disconnected, or where devices have not been installed.

All other independent and dependent validations can be classified into validation

groups in Customizing and then carried out automatically.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 267/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-1

SAP AG 2009

Billing Master Data

Contents:

Introduction

Billing master data

Billing process

Rate Structure

Rate type and rate category

Rates, operands, and schemas

Prices

Rate Determination

Rate Allocation

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 268/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-2

SAP AG 2009

Billing Master Data: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Explain the function of rate master data:

Billing class

Operands and operand values

Rate type and rate category

Prices

Explain the concept of the rate structure:

Components of the rate

Flow definition of the variant programs in the schema

Rate determination

Describe rate allocation

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 269/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-3

SAP AG 2009

Billing Master Data: Business Scenario

Sales and marketing requirements

Description of new products and market segments

Energy industry

Specification, checking and release of new contracts

Customizing of billing master data

Creation of rate category and rate type

Definition of rates, prices, and discounts

Maintenance of agreed special conditions

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 270/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-4

SAP AG 2009

Billing Master Data: Introduction

Billing master data enables you to specify contractbilling rules for both residential and commercial andindustrial customers and provides the basis for acomplete mapping of all rates.

The extremely flexible and universal structuring ofrates allows you to implement new and creativesales and marketing concepts.

An open architecture allows you to adapt andsucceed in a changing environment.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 271/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-5

SAP AG 2009

Billing Process: Introduction

Billing of contracts for residential as well as commercial andindustrial customers

Supports billing procedures for international utilitymanagement, such as periodic, interim, and period-end billing,floating backbilling, final billing, budget, average monthly, andequalized billing

Open to new billing procedures

Third party billing and cross-company code billing

Special features: Examples includethermal gas billing, billing for external

generators and installations without a meter 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 272/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-6

SAP AG 2009

Generationof billingline items

Validation

of billingresults

Executionof variant

programs

according toschema

Quantity

conversionand

proration

Data

entryand

analysis

Data relating tocustomer and

installation

Rate data Procedure data

Contract

. . .

Schema 1Rate Var.pr. Values

Rate 1

- Step 1 VarProg. A x1- Step 2 VarProg. B x2

. . .Rate 2

- Step1 VarProg. A x3- Step2 VarProg. C x4- Step3 VarProg. D x5

. . .

. . .

. . .

Rate n- Step 1 VarProg. A xxx

EXECUTI

ON

InstallationR  a  t  e c  a  t  e  g  o r   y  

Prices andrate facts

Rate 1

Rate n

Rate Structure

Ratedeter-

mination

  R a  t e

   t  y  p eInst. structure

Rate cat. facts/Installation facts

Inst. structureRate cat. facts/

Installation facts

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 273/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-7

SAP AG 2009

Rate Type Rate Category

 Ho use ho ld  ra te

 Wa te r, ...

....

 1  m 3 Wa te r  .  .  3.50 Mo n t h l y  re n t  .  4.00

....

Allocates

 A particular rate category and

rate type for a particular period

to a rate.

Rate Determination

 

  The rate is determined dynamically from the rate type of the register and the rate category of the

installation.

  Rate determination is managed historically.

  This has the advantage that rate changes can be performed easily. You are then not required to

change the rate types and rate categories in the master data. Instead, a new rate is determined

starting at a new from-date.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 274/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-8

SAP AG 2006

Billing Class: 1

Classifies installations within a division, for exampleresidential/C&I contract

Can be valid for multiple rate categories

Used for validation in scheduling and in the billing master data

Enables several franchise fee groups to be defined

Can be used as a statistical criterion

If you change the billing class, you must also change the ratecategory. You do not have to perform a final billing

 

  The billing class classifies installations for billing.

  The billing class is also used for the following purposes:

  For consistency verifications between the master data and billing master data. For example, you

can verify that a residential customer's installation has not been allocated to a nonresidential

contract.

  As a statistical criterion, for example in the sales statistics.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 275/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-9

SAP AG 2006

Rate Category I

Valid for one division only

Belongs to a single billing class

Contains one valid billing schema

Controls billing - used to determine the rate in conjunction

with the rate type

Determines which outsorting checks occur during billing

Controls accompanying backbilling and period-end billing for

nonresidential customers

Controls advance billing and dynamic period control

 

  The rate category classifies the installation for billing. The rate category is used in conjunction with

the rate types to determine the rate.

  Rate determination:

rate type + rate category = rate

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 276/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-10

SAP AG 2006

RateCategoryBilling Class

OutsortingGroup

Division

Notes BackbillingPeriod-End Billing

DynamicPeriod Control

Billing Scheme

Billing in Advance

Rate Category II

 

  The rate category contains data that controls the processing of billing data. This includes:

  Billing Scheme

  Control of period-end billing and accompanying backbilling

  Outsorting checks

  Any other billing-relevant data is also saved in the rate category. This includes any agreed

quantities, demand, prices, or flat rates. In the case of flat rate services (such as cable services and

street lights), no quantities are measured. You must therefore define replacement values that the

system can use for evaluation (for example number of cable connections or number of street lights

with a specific connection value).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 277/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 278/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-12

SAP AG 2009

Rate

Billing rule for a device, register, or reference value

The sum of all the steps relevant to billing that are performed

during the billing process

These steps are represented by one or more variant programs, thesequence of which is specified in the billing schema.

The rate can be permissible for either 

the register 

the device

the reference value (facts)

Rate steps affect accountdetermination and the creation ofbilling line items.

 

  Rates specify:

•  How measured consumption values are extrapolated or divided up during meter reading data

 processing and prorations

•  Which billing-related values are measured by a register

•  Which reference values are billed (for example, for flat-rate services)

•  In which calculation formulas the measured values or reference values are used

•  Which prices are used

•  Which constants, factors, and influencing factors are included in the calculation

•  To which general ledger accounts the calculation results (bill line items) are posted

•  How the bill line items are treated statistically

•  The division and billing classes to which the rate is allocated

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 279/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-13

SAP AG 2003

QUANTITY FACTOR QUANTITY

Calculates x% of a quantity

QUANTITY FACTOR QUANTITY

Calculates x% of a quantity

. . .. . .

. . .. . .

NUMBER OF DEMAND PEAKS DEMANDCalculates N peak averages

NUMBER OF DEMAND PEAKS DEMANDCalculates N peak averages

DEMAND PRICE BILLING LINE ITEMSValuates demand with a price

DEMAND PRICE BILLING LINE ITEMSValuates demand with a price

. . .. . .

QUANTITY QUANTITY QUANTITY

Difference of two quantities

QUANTITY QUANTITY QUANTITY

Difference of two quantities

. . .. . .

. . .. . .

QTY PRICE BILLING LINEValuates energy with a price ITEMS

QTY PRICE BILLING LINEValuates energy with a price ITEMS

ACT_KWH 0.5 ACT_50%ACT_KWH 0.5 ACT_50%

REACT_KWH- ACT_50% BILL_REACTREACT_KWH- ACT_50% BILL_REACT

BILL_REACT USD 0.06 BILLING LINEITEMS

BILL_REACT USD 0.06 BILLING LINEITEMS

Variant poolVariant pool

Variant poolVariant pool

Contract text:

The reactive energy that exceeds50% of the active energy is valuatedusing a separate price.

Contract text:

The reactive energy that exceeds50% of the active energy is valuatedusing a separate price.

*

*

**

*

-

Example: Billing Rule for Electricity

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 280/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-14

SAP AG 2003

Rate step Fact group

Grouping of individualfacts allocated to a rate

Elementary calculation andprocessing step

Rate

Rate Structure

 

  A rate is a billing rule for a register or a reference value, that is, all billing-related steps executed

during billing.

  A rate step is represented by one or more variant programs. These are small, independent programs

that perform elementary calculation steps.

  Several rate fact groups can be allocated to one rate. In this way, if the same rate is used, the

operands can still be filled with different values.

  A rate step is determined by the variant that is being used.

  Variants are small, independent programs that perform elementary calculation steps.

  Many variants calculate values relevant to billing and therefore generate billing line items. Other

variants convert values and make the results available to subsequent variants.

  Variants usually have input and output operands which represent the parameters included in the

variant. These operands belong to a particular operand category.

•  In the rate, a combination of variants is used to model the billing rules.

  Example of fact group:

The rate fact group X contains the rate facts "minimum demand = 20 kW" and "discount rate =

10%". This means that if the customer uses at least 20 kW, he/she receives a discount of 10%.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 281/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-15

SAP AG 2003

Rate

Permissibility

Division

Usage type

Register operand

Validation class

Minimum timeportion required for

extrapolation

Billing class

Rate Data

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 282/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-16

SAP AG 2009

Rate stepDebit and creditbudget billing

sub-transactions

Statistical rate

Fine-tuned control ofvariants (additional

parameters)

Franchise feegroup

Input operand(s)and

output operand(s)

Variant program

Indicator for optionalbilling step

Debit and creditbilling sub-

transactions

Data for the Rate Step

 

  Variants are modules in the rate or in the schema that contain a billing rule.

  A sub-transaction is a key that classifies the document item for account determination.

It differentiates the main transaction.

  Optional billing step indicator: Schema steps can only be executed in billing if all input operands

are supplied with values for the entire period that the step covers. If this is not the case, the optional

indicator is checked:

  If the indicator is not set, billing of the contract is terminated

  If the indicator is set, the schema step is not executed.

Processing then continues with the next schema step.

  Input and output operand: Description determined within a company for the values that are usedas input and output parameters in variant programs.

  Statistical rate: You must specify a statistical rate for all rate steps that generate billing line items.

During billing, the statistical rate is written to the billing line item. This rate key can be used to

analyze the billing documents.

  Franchise fee group: A company's own grouping of business partners subject to the same franchise

fee conditions (such as major customers or households).

  Fine-tuned variant control: Some variant programs require additional input parameters to define

the action of the variant programs. Example: Depending on the settings, a variant that subtracts two

values can also create negative differences or suppress them.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 283/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-17

SAP AG 2009

Fact Group

Fact Group

Operands

OperandValues

 

  A fact group is the grouping of individual facts allocated to a rate.

  Facts are

  Concrete values such as 100 kW

  Keys, for example for prices that are allocated to operands and are valid for a certain period of

time.

  Operands are allocated to the fact group.

  Operands manage the operand values.

  The operand values represent the historically managed characteristics of the operands.

  Example: Fact group X contains the following rate facts:

  Minimum demand 20 kW

  Discount 10%

  This means that if the customer uses at least 20 kW, he/she receives a discount of 10%.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 284/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-18

SAP AG 2003

Operands

Operandcategory

Division

Unit ofmeasurement

Historymanagement

Weighting key

Access control

Rounding rules

Determination of the

demand peaks

Operand Data

 

  The operand category classifies the operands for the variant programs.

  Rounding rules consist of:

  The place to which rounding is carried out:

-  If you specify a positive value, rounding is performed to that number of places after the

decimal point.

-  If you specify a negative value, rounding is performed to that number of places before the

decimal point.

  The rounding type (the principle used to round):

-  + for rounding up-  - for rounding down

-  0 for rounding to the nearest whole number

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 285/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-19

SAP AG 2006

Operand category Description

AMOUNT Amount

DEMAND Demand

FACTOR Number with decimal places

QUANT Quantity

QPRICE Quantity-based price

REFVALUE Reference value

SEASON Season

TPRICE Time-based price

Operand Categories/Examples

USERDEF User-defined value

 

  Operands link values to be billed and variant programs.

  An operand is allocated to an operand category and a division. Operand categories determine the

functions of the operands The variant program determines which operand categories can be used as

input and output operands.

  The system contains 20 different operand categories.

  The operand categories are predefined by SAP and cannot be changed.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 286/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 287/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-21

SAP AG 2008

Price C0.70

Price C0.70

Price B0.60

Price B0.60Rate category factsRate category factsRate category facts

Rate facts and rate fact groupRate facts and rate fact groupRate facts and rate fact group

Have precedence over 

Have precedence over 

Price A0.55

Price A0.55

   H    i

  e  r  a  r  c   h  y

Allocation of Operand Values

Installation factsInstallation facts

 

  Operand values are usually stored in the rate facts and are, therefore, valid at rate level. Cross-rate

operand values can also be defined in the rate category facts and installation facts. They have

 priority over the rate facts.

  At rate fact and rate category fact levels, you can also enter replacement values. These replacement

values give you more flexibility when allocating operand values.

  You can also historically overwrite operand values. In this way, a different price key can be

allocated to a certain installation for only a certain period of time, for example, a month. In the other

months, the values from the rate facts are used.

  If no operand value can be determined during billing, the system cancels billing and outputs an error

in the application log. Exception: the rate step is marked in the rate as an optional rate step.

  In the rate facts and rate category facts, you define general operand values. These apply to groups of

customers. An installation fact level, you define individual values, such as connection values and

number of persons.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 288/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-22

SAP AG 2009

Schema I

Is valid for a certain division

Is valid for a certain billing class

Contains one or more rates

Determines the sequence of the rate

steps for billing

Contains indicators for 

billing line item relevant to posting

billing line item relevant to statistics

 

  A schema is a structure that determines the sequence in which variant programs of the rates to be

 billed are executed.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 289/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-23

SAP AG 2009

Schema II

Dependent on the rate category in theinstallation

Influences sorting of the billing lineitems on the bill form

Controls the grouping of billing lineitems

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 290/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-24

SAP AG 2006

Price Categories

Quantity-based pricefor quantities and consumption values

Flat-ratefixed amounts per time unit (consumptionflat-rates and flat-rate amounts)

Rental pricefor the use of a measuring deviceover a certain period of time

Time-based price

for demand and connection values

 

  The price categories are predefined by SAP and cannot be changed.

  The price categories are used internally to control data processing. Normally, you create the prices

 based on the rate. In this case, the correct rate is proposed by the system.

  The price category is a characteristic in the header data.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 291/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-25

SAP AG 2006

Standard price:Price not based on quantity

Zone price:One or more quantity-based prices

Scale price:Quantity-based price

Price Types

 

  The price type specifies how the particular price is to be used.

  In addition to standard single prices, you can also use scale and block prices.

  Certain sequential quantity ranges (for demand and/or energy) are defined by price scaling. If one

quantity range is exceeded, the price for the next quantity range applies for the entire quantity. In

this way, higher consumption can be cheaper than lower consumption.

  Certain sequential quantity areas (for demand and/or energy) are defined by price blocking for

which certain prices apply, in other words different prices are used. This prevents higher

consumption from being cheaper than lower consumption.

  The price type is a characteristic in the header data.

  Block and scale limits are maintained in the historical data.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 292/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-26

SAP AG 2003

The discount category defines a discount or surcharge.

The discount type determines the calculation of:

Absolute values

Relative values

The reference defines how the discount is applied:

Quantity

Price

Amount

Discounts / Surcharges

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 293/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-27

SAP AG 2003

Billing master data is classified by:

Billing class

Ratecategory

Rate type

The rate consists of:

Variants, which are provided with operands

A schema, which determines the processing sequence

of the variants Prices, discounts, and surcharges

Indirect rate determination

Reduced maintenance of data in the case of ratechanges

Billing Master Data: Unit Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 294/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-28

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 295/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-29

Exercises

Unit: Billing Master Data

Topic: Rate Structure

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Describe the elements and the structure of a rate.

•  Carry out a price change for a particular key date.

•  Adjust the budget billing amount for the business partner.

Provide information to customers on rates and price calculations.

1-1 Which rate categories have been defined in the installations for business partner

TB110110## ?

1-1-1 Electricity

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-1-2 Water

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-2 Which devices and registers are billed to the business partner?

1-2-1 Electricity

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-2 Water

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 296/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-30

1-3 Which rate types are allocated to the business partner at the following levels?

1-3-1 Electricity

Device level: ________________________________________

Register level: ________________________________________

1-3-2 WaterDevice level: ________________________________________

Register level: ________________________________________

1-4 Carry out rate determination for the rate categories and rate types in tasks 1-1 and 1-3.

Division Rate category Rate type Rate determined

Electricity

Electricity

Water

1-5 Provide information on the electricity rate E1_1.

1-5-1 For which object is the rate permissible?

 __________________________________________________

1-5-2 From which components is the rate comprised?

 Name the variant programs and describe the functions: __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

1-5-3 Which operands belong to the rate fact group?

What is their significance?

 __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

 __________________________________________________

1-5-4 What is the energy price?

 __________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 297/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-31

1-6 (Optional) 

The consumption of the flat-rate installation for business partner TB010110##  has

increased.

As a result, the installation must be extended by installing an additional meter as of

today's date. Extend the flat-rate electricity installation by installing a meter using

today’s date and the following details:

Connection Object: TB010110##  Device Location: TB010112DL0##  

Installation: TB010130##  

 New Device: TB010130##  with installation meter reading 250 

Make sure that you only allocate household rate data at register level 

 Note that you must adapt the billing-relevant data for the installation to the new

circumstances before the device is installed to ensure that billing and the billing-related

installation of the device are correct.

To do this, you must allocate a suitable rate category to the installation and limit the

installation facts: For example, rate category E1 instead of E4, since the installation isnow measured and no longer a flat-rate installation.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 298/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-32

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 299/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-33

Solutions

Unit: Billing Master Data

Topic: Rate Structure

1-1 Identify business partner TB110110##  in the IC and display the data for this business

 partner.

Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service→ Front-Of fi ce/Customer I nteraction Center

→ Customer I nteraction Center

From the Info  action, choose Customer Overview  for the business partner. The ratecategory is on the bottom tab page of each contract.

Alternatively, you can double-click the installation(s) in the navigation area.

1-2 Display the utility installations for the business partner from the customer environment.

In the installations, choose the Devices button. 

1-3 Display the utility installations for the business partner from the customer environment.

In the installations, choose the Bill ing View  button.You can find the rate types for the devices in the billing view on the Rate Types tab

page. 

1-4 For rate determination, go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Bil ling→ Master Data→ Defi ne Rate Determination  

Division ategory Rate type Rate determined

Electricity 1001 E1_1

Electricity 1002 E1_2

Water 3001 W1_1

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 300/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-34

1-5 Display the business partner installation.

Choose Bil ling View .

You can find the rates on the Rates  tab page.

Double click on the rate key.

1-5-1  In the Permissibility  display area, you can see

that the rate is only permitted for registers.

1-5-2 In the rate, choose the Rate Steps button. 

You can see a description of the variant by choosing Environment→ Variant

Documentation .

1-5-3 In the rate, choose the Facts  button.

You can now see the operands.

You can display the operand values by choosing Expand .

It is helpful to show the color legend here.

Utilities → Color Legend .

1-5-4 Double-click on the operand value.Depending on the price category, you may need to double-click on the price too

(with block and scale prices).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 301/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 8-35

1-6 Call the maintenance screen for the flat-rate installation of business partner

TB010110## : 

In the navigation area, select the flat-rate installation.

Click on the right mouse button to choose Rate Maintenance.

Choose the time slice overview and specify today’s date for the selection. Set the

Prorate  indicator and choose the newly created time slice by double-clicking on it. Anew time slice for the installation data relevant to billing opens automatically.

The rate category E4 that was entered was defined as the rate category for flat-rate

installations and is only suitable for the rate types set down in the (installation) facts.

Since another rate has to be found for the device installed, you have to specify a rate

category that matches a rate type at device or register level. For this reason, change the

rate category in the current time slice to E1.

To ensure that your billing is correct, you must also specify the validity of the previous

rate type in the installation facts.

To do this, choose the Facts  button. On the following screen, select the rate type by

double-clicking on it.Limit the period of validity to the day before the installation of the device.

You may have to delete another automatically generated continuation line before you can

copy the settings.

Choose Copy  to transfer the settings and then save them.

The installation is now ready for billing-related device installation.

 Now call the device installation transaction from the SAP Easy Access menu by

choosing:

Uti li ties I ndustry  Device Management  Device I nstall ation  Installation  Full  

Device Location: TB010112DL0##  

Installation: TB010130##  

Activity Date: Today's date

 New Device: TB010130##  

To continue processing, choose Enter .

Activity Reason: 02 Installation extension 

Meter Reading Recorded: 250 

Periodic Consumption: 1000 

Rate Type:: 1002 Off-peak active energy 

Fact Group: 0001 Residential customer  Activate the indicator for payment of rental and clearing charges.

Save your entries.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 302/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 303/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-1

SAP AG 2009

Billing and Invoicing

Contents:

Billing

Overview

Billing functions

Special functions

Invoicing

Overview

Invoicing functions Creation of print and contract accounting documents

Exception Management

Overview

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 304/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-2

SAP AG 2009

Billing and Invoicing: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the billing process

Billing process, simulation

Credit memo, manual backbilling

Outsorting, bill reversal

Describe the features of invoicing

Invoicing tasks and process

Special features of invoicing Use of invoicing documents

Describe the features of exception management

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 305/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-3

SAP AG 2009

ImplausibleMR results

ImplausibleMR results

Plausible

MR results

Plausible

MR results

MR

order 

MR

order 

Billingorder 

Billingorder 

Billingorder 

Billingorder 

Billingdocument

Billingdocument

MRorder

creation

MRrecording

Billing Invoicing

MRcorrection

SAP Utilities Meter Reading / Bill / Invoice

Printdocument

Printdocument

Invoiceprintout

 

  Meter reading order creation: Meter reading orders are created for each register.

  Billing orders are created for each contract.

  A billing order is automatically created with the meter reading order. However, the billing order

does not have billable status. The billing order can only be billed once plausible meter reading

results have been entered.

  The billing order is deleted during billing. The billing process creates a billing document that is the

 basis for invoicing.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 306/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-4

SAP AG 2009

Billing

Overview

Billing procedures and special functions

Billing and simulation process

Formation of billing rules

Billing functions

Scheduled dates and periods

Billing transactions

Billing and simulation

Document display

Special functions

Credit memo, manual backbilling

Outsorting, reversal

Content

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 307/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-5

SAP AG 2003

Contract billing of the supply and services

provided is the most important function of autility company.

Integrated processing of both residential andcommercial and industrial customers requiresseveral billing rules.

Increased competition requires the billingprocess to be flexible and efficient.

Different types of simulation enable the correct

billing to be performed.

Billing: Introduction

SAP Utilities

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 308/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-6

SAP AG 2009

Move-Out processing in the customer center 

Move-Out date and meter readings reported bytelephone

Implausible meter reading requires meter reading bythe company

Meter reading processing

Create meter reading order 

Enter or estimate meter reading results

Start of billing and invoicing Final billing, followed by invoicing

Billing: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 309/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-7

SAP AG 2003

Universal Billing Engine

Generation

of billingline items

Validation

of billingresults

Executionof variant

programs

according toschema

Quantity

conversionand

proration

Data

entryand

analysis

Data relating tocustomer and

installation

Rate data Procedure data

Contract

. . .

Schema 1Rate Var.pr. Values

Rate 1

- Step 1 VarProg. A x1- Step 2 VarProg. B x2

. . .Rate 2

- Step1 VarProg. A x3- Step2 VarProg. C x4- Step3 VarProg. D x5

. . .

. . .

. . .

Rate n- Step 1 VarProg. A xxx

EXECUTBON

Inst. structureRate cat. facts/

Installation facts

Inst. structureRate cat. facts/

Installation facts

InstallationR a t e c a t e g o r  y 

Prices andrate facts

Rate 1

Rate n

Ratedeter-

mination

  R a  t e 

  t  y  p e

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 310/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-8

SAP AG 2009

Billing in SAP Utilities

Discounts,surcharges

Generalduties

Pro-rations

Franchisefees

Priceadjustment

. . . . . .

ResidentialcustomersCommercial

& industrialcustomers

Co-generator 

Bus iness

Partner 

Elec-tricity

Gas

Water/Waste water 

Districtheating

Cabletelevision

MultimediaCharges,

taxesduties

Div is ions 

ConsumptionService

Flat rates

Billing rules, variants

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 311/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-9

SAP AG 2009

Billing Procedure

Billing Procedure

On a monthly basis

Key date

Period

To-the-day

Seasonal

Comparative (best-rate billing)

For employeesRolling (back-billing, final

billing)

Special Functions

Interim billing

Outsorting for bill verification

Simulation

Manual backbilling

Manual credit memo

Reversal procedure

Unbilled revenue reporting

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 312/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-10

SAP AG 2003

Meter reading

Billing

Invoicing

Billing order processing that involves valuatingconsumption and services for individualcontracts, and creating billing documents forinvoicing.

Definition of Billing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 313/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-11

SAP AG 2003

Billing

Determination ofbilling periods

Determination andconversion of

quantities

Creation of billingdocuments forinvoicing

Determination of •Rate data•Price data

Determination ofchange date and

proration to thatdate

Valuation ofquantities withprices

Billing Tasks

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 314/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-12

SAP AG 2006

MO TU WE TH FR SA SU

18152128

29162229

310172330

411182431

5121925

6132026

7142127

Length of period for periodic billing

n days; 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 months

Length of period for period-end billing

n + n days; 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 months

To-the-day billing

Based on the date of the meter reading

Month-based billing

Dependent on key date Month-based billing

Dependent on intervals

Billing Periods

 

  The billing period for which the utility bills the customer can be determined in a number of ways.

These are:

•  For an exact number of days

Determines the exact length of the billing period in days, for example the period between the last

 billed meter reading and the current day of meter reading.

•  Month-based 

Bills a specific number of complete months. If the case of a move-in or move-out, the month-

 based procedure can be billed based on the number of days.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 315/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-13

SAP AG 2009

Forms of Billing

Periodic BillingRecurring periodic billing

Floating BackbillingSpecial form of monthly periodic billing in which backbillingis performed for previous months using a current valuefor example, monthly comparison of N peak average

Period-end BillingBilling occurs upon the conclusion of the billing cyclefor example, 13th billing, when a year is back-billed

Interim Billingunscheduled billing at any time; can be initiated at the customer's request

Final Billingwhen the customer moves out or when the contract is terminated

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 316/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-14

SAP AG 2003

Best-rate billingThe most favorable rate is chosen for thecustomer on the basis of several billingrules.

Quantity-based rate for basic priceThe annual quantity consumed is usedto determine the billingrule that applies.

Demand-based rate determinationThe measured demand is used to determine the billing rule thatapplies.

Season-based billingExamples: Different prices for each season, different billing rulesfor each season.

Special Forms of Billing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 317/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-15

SAP AG 2009

Energy price

Demand price

Basic and serviceprice

Seasonal valuesand variants

Block and scaleprice

Usage hours

Best-rate billing

Decision

variants

Billing

General Billing Functions

 

  Energy prices are used to valuate measured or calculated consumption. For example:

  Adjustment of calculated consumption over the course of the billing period

  Comparison with maximum/minimum purchase quantities and further processing of difference

quantities

  Breakdown/valuation of energy quantities using different percentage rates or time criteria

  Demand price  s are used to valuate measured or calculated demand. The number of the measured

demand values used for calculating the demand to be billed is variable. For example:

  Comparison with minimum demand, maximum demand, or other demand established in the

contract, and further processing of the difference demand (such as excess demand)

  Breakdown and valuation of demand using different percentage rates

  You can valuate any number of demand replacement values with time-based prices for the provision 

of the supply. The demand replacement values can also be levied as a flat rate.

  Block  and scale price

  Seasonal values and variants

  Decision variants

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 318/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-16

SAP AG 2003

Billability check

Consideration ofregister

relationships

Manual credit memosand backbilling

Billing of companyand plantconsumption

Determination oftaxes, duties, andcharges

Energy feedingfrom small powerproducers

Special Billing Functions

Billing

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 319/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-17

SAP AG 2008

Billing and Simulation

SimulationBilling

SAPSAP

UTUT

Billing Types

Reverse

billing

Date reachedfor 

billing

Enter selectioncriteria

Select type ofbilling

Bi l l in gselected

Simulationselected

Startbilling

Startsimulation

Check

billingdocuments

Check

simulationdocuments

Startinvoicing

simulation

Billing

documentsimplausible

Billingdocuments

correct

Billingdocumentsincorrect

Outsortdocuments

Startinvoicing

Choosebilling type

Description:

Creation of billing documents usedonly for further processing ininvoicing

Description:

Creation of simulationdocuments that are only used forfurther processing in invoicingsimulation

Processing Steps:

Billing order is retained andand can still be used forsimulation

Meter reading results can still

be changed

Simulation document iscreated

Processing Steps:

The billing order is deleted andcannot be billed again

Meter reading results cannot be

changed again

Billing document is created

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 320/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-18

SAP AG 2009

Simulation Types

Reverse

billing

Date reachedfor 

billing

Enter selectioncriteria

Select type ofbilling

Bi l l in gselected

Simulationselected

Startbilling

Startsimulation

Checkbilling

documents

Checksimulationdocuments

Startinvoicing

simulation

Bi l l in gdocumentsimplausible

Billing

documentscorrect

Bi l l in gdocuments

incorrect

Outsort

documents

Start

invoicing

Choosesimulation

type

Description:

Billing can be simulated without abilling order for any group and forany period of time.

Processing Steps:

Simulation period can be freelydefined

Extrapolation that takes accountof meter reading results

Period can already have beenbilled

Description:

Billing is simulated on the basisof a billing order that can beprocessed.

Processing Steps:

Period is determined by thebilling order 

Meter reading results relevantto billing are required

Valuation of billing

Check capacity for billing

SAPSAP

UTUT

SimulationBilling

simulation

SimulationTypes

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 321/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-19

SAP AG 2003

Reverse billing

Billing datereached

Enter selectioncriteria

Choose billingtype

Bi l l in gchosen

Simulationchosen

Startbilling

Start simulation

Check billingdocuments

Checksimulationdocuments

Start invoicingsimulationBilling documents

implausibleBilling documents

correct

Billing documentsincorrect

Outsort

documents

Start invoicing

Check

documents

Simulationdocument

Billingdocument

Description:

Simulation produces asimulation document

Billing produces a billingdocument

Purpose Documents the procedure

Saves and validates the results

Used for further processing of billing line items

Document Types

Simulation

Billing

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 322/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-20

SAP AG 2003

Reverse billing

Billing datereached

Enter selectioncriteria

Choose billingtype

Bi l l in gchosen

Simulationchosen

Startbilling

Start simulation

Check billingdocuments

Checksimulationdocuments

Start invoicingsimulationBilling documents

implausibleBilling documents

correct

Billing documentsincorrect

Outsort

documents

Start invoicing

Check

documents

Internalbillingdata

Account data

Print data

Meter readingdata

Device data

Price data

Billing

line items

Documentsfrom

• Simulation

• Billing

Rate data

Document Information

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 323/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-21

SAP AG 2003

Reverse billing

Billing datereached

Enter selectioncriteria

Choose billingtype

Billingchosen

Simulationchosen

Startbilling

Start simulation

Check billingdocuments

Checksimulationdocuments

Start invoicingsimulationBilling documents

implausibleBilling documents

correct

Billing documentsincorrect

Outsort

documents

Start invoicing

Processdocuments

further 

Billingreversal

Outsorting

InvoicingInvoicingsimulation

Further Processing of Documents

Documentsfrom

• Simulation

• Billing

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 324/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 325/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 326/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-24

SAP AG 2008

Billing Reversal

Description:

Only one billing document isreversed. This can occur with orwithout a subsequent correctionbill.

Possible Reasons: Incorrect conditions for

nonresidential contract

Incorrect meter reading result

Technical fault

...

ReverseBilling

Individualreversal

SAPSAP

UTUT

Massreversal

Reverse

billing

Date reachedfor 

billing

Enter selectioncriteria

Select type ofbilling

Bi l l in gselected

Simulationselected

Startbilling

Startsimulation

Checkbilling

documents

Checksimulationdocuments

Startinvoicingsimulation

Billingdocumentsimplausible

Billing

documentscorrect

Bi l l in gdocuments

incorrect

Outsort

documents

Start

invoicing

Reversedocuments

Description:

More than one billing documentis reversed. Selection takesplace using document intervalsor lists ofindividual documents.

Possible Reasons: Incorrect billing group

Incorrect rates and prices

Incorrect sales tax

...

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 327/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-25

SAP AG 2003

16.2.04Incorrectbilling document

 Jane Smith

Electricity . . . . 900Gas . . . . . . .1.000Water . . . . . . . 700

Total . . . . . 2.600

Documentoutsorted

Documentimplausible

Reversebilling

Correct dataRestart

billing

23.2.04Reversedbilling document

Billing order 

24.2.04Correctedbilling document

 Jane SmithElectricity . . . . 600Gas . . . . . . 1.000Water . . . . . . . 700

Total . . . . . . . 2.300

Reversal indicator set

 Jane Smith

Electricity . . . . 900Gas . . . . . . 1.000Water . . . . . . . 700

Total . . . . . . .2.600

Reverse billing

Billing datereached

Enter selectioncriteria

Choose billingtype

Bi l l in gchosen

Simulationchosen

Startbilling

Start simulation

Check billingdocuments

Checksimulationdocuments

Start invoicingsimulationBilling documents

implausibleBilling documents

correct

Billing documentsincorrect

Outsort

documents

Start invoicing

Reversedocuments

Billing Reversal Process

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 328/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-26

SAP AG 2003

Billing processes billing orders, valuates

consumption and demand, and creates billingdocuments for invoicing.

There are two types of billing:

Simulation, which creates simulation documents

Billing, which creates billing documents

Outsorted billing documents require additionalprocessing - Documents must be either released orreversed. Reasons for outsorting:

Failed validation

Indicator set in the contract

Individual or mass reversals enable quick correctionand subsequent billing.

Billing: Unit Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 329/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-27

SAP AG 2009

Overview

Definition of invoicing and tasks involved

Distinguishing between invoicing and billing

Invoicing functions

Invoicing units

Cross-company code invoicing

Creation of FI-CA and print documents

Document flow

Bill printout

Outsorting, reversal

Content

Invoicing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 330/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-28

SAP AG 2009

Invoicing links contract billing to contract accounts

receivable and payable, and prepares bill printout.

The bill sum total is determined after clearing billingdocuments against the budget billings already paid,and against the taxes, charges, and duties that aredue.

Flexible clearing options, such as payments foropen items, reduce the amount of manualprocessing required.

Invoicing: Introduction

SAP Utilities

 

  The bill sum total is calculated as follows:

•  Bill sum total = Total receivables from billing

•   paid budget billings

•  other credits (credit memo, payment on account)

•  + other receivables (backbilling, dunning charge)

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 331/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-29

SAP AG 2009

Move-Out processing in the customer center 

Move-Out date and meter readings reported bytelephone

Implausible meter reading requires meter reading bythe company

Meter reading processing

Create meter reading order 

Enter or estimate meter reading results

Start of billing and invoicing

Final billing, followed by invoicing

Invoicing: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 332/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-30

SAP AG 2009

Meter reading

Billing

Invoicing

The process that links the billing documents tocontract accounts receivable and payable, andprovides the basis for bill creation.

Definition of Invoicing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 333/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-31

SAP AG 2008

Invoicing: Overview

FIFI--CACASAPSAP

UTUT

Billing:

Consumption billing createsbilling documents by evaluating

consumption values andservices.

Transactions Relevant forInvoicing

Billing documents

Credit memos

Backbillings

Contract Accounts Receivableand Payable:

Contract Accounts Receivable and

Payable makes processes relevantfor payment available, andmanages the individual accounts.

Transactions Relevant forInvoicing

Open items

Paid budget billing amounts

Manual postings

Dunning charges

Payments on account

Invoicing Bill printout

BB plan

Due date determination

Clearing

Use of credits

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 334/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-32

SAP AG 2009

Invoicing

Joint invoicing

Cross-companycode invoicing

Accountdetermination

Credit clearing

Creation ofbudget billing

plan

Due date

determination

Tasks of Invoicing

Budget billingclearing

Optional Invoicing

tasks

 

  Invoicing is the process that integrates contract billing with the Contract Accounts Receivable and

Payable (FI-CA) component. It also forms the basis for bill creation.

  Optional invoicing tasks:

  Account maintenance

  Interest on Cash securities

  Interest on Receivables

  Dunning

  Late Payment Charges

  Invoicing is used for the following:

  Grouping together billing documents of contracts from the same contract account into one joint

 bill.

  Posting documents to FI-CA (sub-ledger accounting)

  Supplying bill printout documents for bill creation

  Processing budget billing plans

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 335/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-33

SAP AG 2003

Reverseinvoicing

Date for

invoicingreached

Enter selectioncriteria

Chooseinvoicing type

Invoicing chosenInvoicing

simulationchosen

Start invoicing Start invoicingsimulation

Checksimulationdocuments

Simulate billprintout

Invoicing

documentsimplausible

Invoicing

documentscorrect

Invoicing

documentsincorrect

Outsortdocuments

Start bill

printout

Check bill

printoutdocument

Check the FI-CAdocument

Startinvoicing

Creation of invoicing units

Summary of the billing documents in a contract account

can be controlled at contract level.

MandatoryContracts for which the documents must be invoiced together 

OptionalContracts for which the documents can be invoiced together 

ExclusiveContracts for which the documents must be invoiced separately

Invoicing Units

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 336/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-34

SAP AG 2009

Contract 1Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 1Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 2Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 2Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 3Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 3Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 4Optional

Joint invoice

Contract 4Optional

Joint invoice

Document 4Optional

Document 4

Optional

Document 3Mandatory

Document 3Mandatory

Document 1Mandatory

Document 1Mandatory

DocumentOptional

Document

Optional

Billing

Contract 5Exclusive invoice

Contract 5Exclusive invoice

Document 5Exclusive

Document 5Exclusive

DocumentExclusive

DocumentExclusive

InvoicingContractaccount

   B   i   l   l

   B   i   l   l

Mandatory and Optional Contracts: I

 

  Contracts 1-3 have a joint invoicing ID. This means that a bill is only created when documents are

available for all three contracts.

  Contract 4 can - but does not have to be - invoiced with the other contracts.

  Contract 5 is always invoiced separately

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 337/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-35

SAP AG 2009

Contract 1Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 1Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 2Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 2Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 3Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 3Mandatory

Joint invoice

Contract 4Optional

Joint invoice

Contract 4Optional

Joint invoice

Document 4Optional

Document 4

Optional

Document 3Mandatory

Document 3Mandatory

Document 1

Mandatory

Document 1

Mandatory

DocumentDocument

Contract 5Exclusive invoice

Contract 5Exclusive invoice

Document 5Exclusive

Document 5Exclusive

DocumentExclusive

DocumentExclusive

Document 2

Mandatory

Document 2

Mandatory  B   i

   l   l

   B   i   l   l

Billing InvoicingContract

account

Mandatory and Optional Contracts: II

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 338/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-36

SAP AG 2008

Invoicing Options

Reverse

invoicing

Date reachedfor 

invoicing

Enter selectioncriteria

Select type ofinvoicing

Invoicingselected

Invoicing

simulationselected

Startinvoicing

Startinvoicing

simulation

Checksimulationdocuments

Simulate

billprintout

Bi l l in gdocumentsimplausible

Bi l l in gdocuments

correct

Billingdocumentsincorrect

Outsort

documents

Startbill

printout

Check billprintout

document

Check the FI-CA

document

Startinvoicing

SAP Billing Documents

SAP Utilities billing documents

SD billing documents

PM/SM billing documents

Company Code Allocation

Invoicing within a company code

Cross-company code invoicing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 339/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-37

SAP AG 2008

Source of Billing Documents

ExternalExternal

SAPSAP

UTUT

SDSD

CSCS

 Bi l l Ja ne  S m i t h

....

 E lec t r ic i t y  .  .  .  . 600

 Ma i n te na nce  .   1,500

 Te lCo .  .  .  .  .  .  .  700

 To ta l  .  .  .  . 2,800

SAP Systems:

Central invoicing of allprocesses from consumptionbilling, sales and distributionand service managementsimplify the transactions.

Transactions Relevant forInvoicing

SAP Utilities consumptionbilling

SD Sales and Distribution

CS Customer Service

External Systems:

Using standard billingdocuments, billing results fromexternal systems can be invoicedand monitored together withconsumption billing results.

Transactions Relevant forInvoicing

Telecommunications

Heating costs billing

Other unbundling services

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 340/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-38

SAP AG 2009

Invoicing Various Services

Radiator $ 35Radiator $ 35

Waste water $ 50Waste $ 40

Waste water $ 50

Waste $ 40Electricity $ 15Water $ 60Gas $ 80

Electricity $ 15

Water $ 60Gas $ 80

Electricityobtnmnt $ 85

Electricity

obtnmnt $ 85

Gas pipe $ 45Gas pipe $ 45

Simplified Example 

wi thout Tax ! 

Cable TV $ 30Cable TV $ 30

Account: A. Smith

Bill #4711 $ 180

Line items for eachreceivable:Bill #1 ...Bill #2 ...

................

Extrnl bllng doc #7

Service xy $ 70

Billsummary

in SAP Utilities

- One division for several cont

racts ("unbundling" electricity rate)

- Various divisions (S,G,W,...)

in SAP application

- Invoices from SD/CS and SAP

Utilities and billing from external

systems

Disposal service #1 Utility service #2 Energy feeding #3 Other services #4

Total bill #4711:

Bill (#1-#7) $ 510- Budgt bllng amnts pd (#1-#3) $ 330

Final invoice amount $180

Due on January 15, 2010

Sale #5

Maint. charge #6

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 341/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-39

SAP AG 2009

Cross-Company Code Invoicing

Cons. billing #1Electricity 1000,- $Gas 1500,- $Water 600,- $

Other services #3

Cable TV 180,- $

Other services #2

Waste water 500,- $Waste disposal 200,- $

Total bill #4711:

Bill (#1-#3) 3980,- $

- Budgt bllng amnt pd (#1-#3)-3600,- $

still to be paid: 380,- $

Due on 01/15/04

Mayer account (xy)Mayer account (xy)

Re. #4711 380,Re. #4711 380,-- $$

Line items for eachreceivable:

Bill #1 (xy) ...Bill #2 (zz) ...

Bill #3 (rs) ...

General ledger 02Loc. Auth. "zz"

General Ledger 01Municipal utilitycompanies xy

General ledger 03(not relevant for fin.

statements)

TV co "rs"

Electricity rec.Gas rec.Water rec.

Waste water rec.Waste dispsal rec.

Cable TV rec.

Contractsfor "xy"CoCd. 01

Contractsfor "zz"CoCd. 02

Contractsfor "rs"

CoCd. 03

FI-CA

Total Bill #4711

Company xy:

Crss-CoCd. bllng for authrty zz:

Crss-CoCd bllng for TV co rs:

Cross-company

code 

bil l ing 

Third 

party bi l l ing SAPSAP

UTUT FIFI

 

  This is an example of invoicing for different company codes.

  The municipal utility companies xy supply their customers with electricity, gas and water.

  However, XY performs billing on behalf of local authority ZZ for waste water and waste disposal.

  XY also performs billing on behalf of cable company RS for cable TV charges.

  This whole process occurs in the same SAP system, although it involves different companies.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 342/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-40

SAP AG 2003

Baseline date + terms of payment = bill due date

The bill due date is determined from the

following attributes:

Terms of paymentThese determine the source of the baseline date

Baseline date:Posting date, document date, or system date

Terms of payment

Allocated to the contract account centrally

Can be differentiated for incoming and outgoing payment

If a bill falls due on a holiday, the bill due date can becorrected to fall on a working day.

Can be specified for each company in Customizing

Bill Due Date

Reverseinvoicing

Date for

invoicingreached

Enter selectioncriteria

Chooseinvoicing type

Invoicing chosenInvoicing

simulationchosen

Start invoicing Start invoicingsimulation

Checksimulationdocuments

Simulate billprintout

Invoicing

documentsimplausible

Invoicing

documentscorrect

Invoicing

documentsincorrect

Outsortdocuments

Start bill

printout

Check bill

printoutdocument

Check the FI-CAdocument

Startinvoicing

 

  The bill due date can also be combined with the first budget billing.

  Posting date: Date when a business transaction is transferred to one or more accounting ledgers on

document entry.

  Document date: Creation date of original document (for example, a vendor invoice).

  System date: Date when a document is created in the system. This date is automatically specified by

the system.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 343/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-41

SAP AG 2003

Reverseinvoicing

Date for

invoicingreached

Enter selectioncriteria

Chooseinvoicing type

Invoicing chosenInvoicing

simulationchosen

Start invoicing Start invoicingsimulation

Checksimulationdocuments

Simulate billprintout

Invoicing

documentsimplausible

Invoicing

documentscorrect

Invoicing

documentsincorrect

Outsortdocuments

Start bill

printout

Check bill

printoutdocument

Check the FI-CAdocument

Startinvoicing

Credit memos/backbillings

Credit memos/backbillings

Billingdocuments

Billingdocuments

FI-CA documentsFI-CA documentsBudget billing plansBudget billing plans

Posting documents FI-CA

Printdocuments

Startinvoicing

Document Flow in Invoicing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 344/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-42

SAP AG 2009

Clearing Overview

The SAP Utilities clearing concept

as part of SAP Utilities clearing processing defines:

the automatic determination of the useof a payment amount for entering apayment transaction

the automatic allocation of posted open itemsto each other in account maintenance

The selected items are cleared or partially cleared on the basis ofthese allocations.

The clearing concept provides flexible control and enables youto model your own clearing strategy in Customizing.

Reverseinvoicing

Date reached

for invoicing

Enter selectioncriteria

Select type ofinvoicing

Invoicingselected

Invoicingsimulationselected

Startinvoicing

Startinvoicing

simulation

Checksimulationdocuments

Simulatebill

printout

Bi l l in gdocuments

implausible

Billingdocuments

correct

Bi l l in gdocuments

incorrect

Outsortdocuments

Start

billprintout

Check bill

printoutdocument

Check the FI-CAdocument

Startinvoicing

 

  Clearing concept is discussed in greater detail in IUT240 – Financials Contract Accounting.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 345/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 346/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-44

SAP AG 2009

Reverse Invoicing

Transaction

Reversal of FI-CA document

Reversal of bill printoutdocument

Possible reasons

Incorrect layout Printing problems

Bill reversal:

Bill printout and FI-CA documentsfor bills or partial bills are reversedby selection using a reconciliationkey or document number.

Full reversal:

In addition to the bill, billingdocuments are also reversed byselection using a documentnumber. Full reversal does notinclude reversal of partial billingdocuments.

Transaction

Reversal of FI-CA document

Reversal of bill printoutdocument

Reversal of billing document

Possible reasons

Incorrect billing

Bill

reversal

SAPSAP

UTUT

Mass

reversal

Reverse

invoicing

Date reachedfor 

invoicing

Enter selectioncriteria

Select type ofinvoicing

Invoicingselected

Invoicingsimulationselected

Startinvoicing

Startinvoicing

simulation

Checksimulation

documents

Simulatebill

printout

Billing

documentsimplausible

Billing

documentscorrect

Billing

documentsincorrect

Outsortdocuments

Startbill

printout

Check billprintout

document

Check the FI-CAdocument

Reverseinvoicing

Reverse Invoicing

Mass reversal

or 

individual reversal

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 347/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-45

SAP AG 2009

Docoutsorted

Docimplausible

Reverseinvoicing

Correctdata

Startinvoicingagain

Billingdocument

ReverseBi l l in g

Date reachedfor 

billing

Enter selection

criteria

Select type ofbilling

Bi l l in g

selected

Simulation

selected

Startbilling

Startsimulation

Checkbilling

documents

Checksimulationdocuments

Startinvoicing

simulation

Billingdocumentsimplausible

Billingdocuments

correct

Bi l l in gdocumentsincorrect

Outsortdocuments

Startinvoicing

Reversedocuments

 B i l l

Ja ne S mi t h

....

 E lec t rici t y .  . .  900

Gas .  .  .  .  .  1,000

 Wa te r .  .  .  .  .  700

 B udge t b i l l ing amo un ts . 2,900

Cred i t memo  . .  .  300

Reversal indicator set

 R e versed  b i l l

Ja ne S mi t h

....

 E lec t rici t y  .  .  . .  .  . 900

Gas  .  .  .  .  .  1,000

 Wa te r  .  .  .  .  . 700

 B udge t b i l l ing amo un ts . 2,900

Cred i t memo  . .  .  300

Procedure for Bill Reversal

 Ne w  b i l l

Ja ne S mi t h

....

 E lec t rici t y . .  .  900

Gas  .  .  .  .  .  .  1,000

 Wa te r  .  .  .  .  700

 B udge t  b i l l ing amo un ts . 2,500

 R ece i va b le  .  . 100

 

  Accounting documents from Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA), and that were

created by SAP Utilities invoice processing, are reversed. Billing documents from the contract

 billing (IS-U-BI) component and budget billing amounts from the budget billing plan component

can be re-used for invoicing after bill reversal.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 348/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-46

SAP AG 2003

24.2.03Correctedbilling document

 Jane Smith

Electricity . . . . . . 600Gas . . . . . . 1.000

Water . . . . . . 700

Total . . . . . 2.300

 Ne w  bi l l

 Ja ne  S m i t h....

 E lec t r ic i t y .  .  .   900

 Gas  . .  .  .  .  .  .1.000

 Wa te r  .  .  .  .  .  .  700

 B ud.  bi l li ngs .2.500

 To ta l  . .  .  .  . .  . 100

Billing order 

Incorrectbilling document

 Jane Smith

Electricity . . . . . . 900Gas . . . . . . 1.000

Water . . . . . . 700

Total . . . . . 2.600

 Bi l l

 Ja ne  S m i t h....

 E lec t r ic i t y .  . .  .  . 900

 Gas  . .  .  .  .  .   1.000

 Wa te r . .  .  .  .  .  .  . 700

 B ud.  bi l li ngs . .2. 900

C redi t  me mo .. . 300

16.2.03 23.2.03Reversedbilling document

 Jane Smith

Electricity . . . . 900Gas . . . . . 1.000Water . . . . - 700

Total . . . . - 2.600

 Re ve rsed  bi l l

 Ja ne  S m i t h....

 E lec t r ic i t y .  .  . .  900

 Gas  . .  .  .  .  .   1.000

 Wa te r . .  .  .  .  .  .  700

 B ud. bi l li ngs . .  2. 900

C redi t  me mo . .  . 300

Reverseinvoice

Documentoutsorted

Documentimplausible

Reversebilling

Correct dataRestartbilling

Restartinvoicing

Procedure for Full Reversal

 

  This function is a mixture of the bill reversal and billing reversal functions. It enables you to

reverse different types of documents in one step.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 349/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-47

SAP AG 2008

Invoicing: Summary

The invoicing procedure includes:

Invoicing and printing of the bill

Requests for budget billings or creation of partial bills

Different reversal procedures

Flexible clearing control

Budget billing procedure

Budget billing amount: Statistical posting or real debitentry

Payment plan: Fixed amounts or variable amounts

Output

Printout on ERP printer using spool

Raw data interface for external mail processing

Archiving 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 350/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-48

SAP AG 2009

Exception Management: Introduction

SAP Utilities

Business Process Exception Management (BPEM) is a

tool which enables companies to manage processexceptions across all functional areas in one place.

BPEM uses case categories to differentiate exceptionsand to identify solutions and agents.

Cases are created automatically or manually,depending on the type of exception and its triggeringprocess.

Worklists provide users with a list of exceptions toprocess.

 

  Maintain case categories with transaction EMMACCAT1

  Create cases with transaction EMMAC1

  Monitor mass activities and other automatic processes with transaction FPEMMAMA

  View processing logs with transaction EMMA

  Process cases with transaction EMMACL and EMMACLS

  Cases can be generated in many ways: manually by user, i.e. High Bill Complaint; automatically via

a customer program; automatically by SAP program based on defined criteria, i.e. outsorting or error

message.

  Case solutions can be pre-defined, and can be executed manually or automatically.  Exceptions are not necessarily errors. Examples include:

  High bill complaint

  Research missing payment

  Outsorted billing/invoicing documents

  Implausible meter reads

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 351/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-49

Exercises

Unit: Billing and Invoicing

Topic: Billing a Business Partner

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Describe the billing process and tasks

•  Use the billing and simulation functions

Business processes require the billing of an individual customer. In

addition to periodic billing, this may be necessary due to a customer

moving out, at the request of a customer, or to advise a customer, forexample.

Carrying out a simulation for any billing period, or for the actual billing

 period, allows you to provide specific information without altering data.

1-1 Your business partner TB100120##  with contract account TB100120## requires a periodic

 billing.

1-1-1 Call the individual billing processing transaction.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-1-2 On the Individual Bill  screen, enter the following information: the last day of the

 previous month as the document date, your account number, signify that you

will create a meter reading order and results, select the Bill  option and

execute the transaction.

 ___________________________________________________

 ___________________________________________________

 ___________________________________________________

 ___________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 352/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-50

1-1-3 Choose the appropriate schedule record date to create the order and record the

meter readings in the process. Use the entry which is closest to the current date

 but not in the future.

•  Enter a plausible meter reading for each device and register. Use the

correction and estimate functions.

Which values did you enter?Electricity register 1: ___________________________________

Gas register 1 ___________________________________

Water register 1 ___________________________________

1-1-4 Note in the log that a billing document has been outsorted. Call the outsort

 processing transaction and process it by releasing the outsorted document.

1-1-5 Call the Create Bill (individual) transaction.

1-1-6 Enter IBMMDDYY-XX  in the Reconciliation Key field and confirm the contract

account number and dates, then execute. Confirm the reconciliation key to becreated and view the log/display the completed document.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 353/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-51

1-2 Your business partner TB100110##  would like an interim bill.

Enter the meter readings supplied by the customer.

Display the individual simulation of the bill.

Check the results and then exit the genuine bill.

1-2-1 Enter the meter readings for business partner TB100110## . Use the IC to do

this.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

Which meter readings have you entered?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-2 Carry out the individual simulation and display the billfor business partner TB100110## .

•  For the bill simulation, go to the SAP Easy Access menu

and choose Uti li ties I ndustry  Billi ng Billi ng

Execution  Individual Processing Individual

Simulation Bil l ing  

•  Use the contract account to make your selections.

•  Choose the Display bil l  level of processing.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-2-3 Process the individual bill for

 business partner TB100110## .

•  For the individual bill, go to the SAP Easy Access menu

and choose Uti li ties I ndustry  Billi ng Billi ng

Execution  Individual Processing I ndividual Bi ll  

•  Use the contract account to make your selections.

•  Choose the Bill  level of processing.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 354/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-52

1-3 Display the billing document for the water contract with business partner TB100110##  

and answer the following questions.

1-3-1 Display the billing document.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

1-3-2 What was the scheduled billing period?

 ______________________________________________________

1-3-3 How many line items does the billing document contain?

 ______________________________________________________

1-3-4 Which document line item types are present and what do they mean?

Document line item type Meaning

1-3-5 What was the total billing quantity determined?

 ______________________________________________________

1-4 True or false?

1-4-1 Billing is always carried out after the meter reading and before invoicing.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-2 Billing simulation must be carried out before billing.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-3 After billing, billable orders are produced.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-4 The billing documents are processed further during invoicing.

 ______________________________________________________

1-4-5 Individual billing items can be entered manually as backbilling or as a credit

memo. ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 355/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-53

Exercises

Unit: Billing and Invoicing

Topic: Invoicing a Business Partner

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Describe the invoicing process and tasks

•  Use the invoicing and simulation functions

•  Explain the budget billing procedure.

The billing results are compared with the transactions in open item

accounting. The final bill amount is determined in this way.

After calculating the budget billing plan for the next period, the bill can be

 printed with details of the bill due date and the new budget billing amount

due date.

2-1 Perform the invoice simulation for business partner TB100110##  who was billed in

exercise 1-2-3. Carry out the following steps:

2-1-1 Simulate the invoice.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-1-2 Check the log.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-1-3 Display the print document.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-1-4 Simulate the bill.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 356/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-54

2-2 Process the actual invoice for business partner TB100110## .

2-2-1 Invoice the business partner.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-2-2 Check the log. ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-2-3 Display the bill from the customer overview.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-3 Provide information on the print document.

2-3-1 From the customer overview, display the print document for business partner TB100110## .

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-3-2 How many line items does the print document contain?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-3-3 What is the final bill amount?

 ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-3-4 Which rate was used in the calculation?

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-3-5 What is the due date of the bill?

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 357/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-55

2-4 True or false?

2-4-1 Invoicing is only carried out after billing.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-4-2 The invoice constitutes a joint bill for all the contracts in a contract account. ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-4-3 The invoice includes billing documents from other company codes.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-4-4 The due date of the bill is always derived from the posting date and

the terms of payment.

 ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2-4-5 The invoice generates print documents.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-4-6 The invoice can be reversed separately or together with the bill.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

2-4-7 The invoice only includes statistically posted budget billing amounts.

 ______________________________________________________

 ______________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 358/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-56

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 359/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-57

Solutions

Unit: Billing and Invoicing

Topic: Billing a Business Partner

1-1 From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: 

1-1-1 Uti li ties I ndustry→ Bill ing→ Bi ll ing Execution → Individual Processing → 

I ndividual Bill  

1-1-2 Enter TB100120##  in the Contract account. field, the last day of the previous

month in the Document date field, and activate the checkbox next to the Enter

billing order/ME results field and click on the Execute icon.1-1-3 At the List of Schedule Records screen, scroll to the entry which is closest to and

less than the current date, and click on it. At the next screen,  Display Schedule

 Record, click on the Create Order  button. At the next screen, Single Entry,

click on the Estimate button, then click on the Save button to save the entry. 

Repeat this for each of the other contracts.

1-1-4 Click on the Log  button to check the log and view the results. Note that one billing

document has been outsorted. Follow the menu path: Uti li ties I ndustry→ Bill ing→ 

Bil li ng Execution → Outsorti ng, enter TB100120##  in the Business Partner field, and

click on the Execute icon. Select the billing document and click on the Release

document  button

1-1-5 Follow the menu path: Util iti es I ndustry→ Bill ing→ Bi ll ing Execution→ 

I ndividual Processing→ I ndividual Bill. Enter IBMMDDYY-XX in the

 Reconciliation Key field, click on the Invoice radio button in the Level of

 Processing  section, confirm the account number and dates, then click on the

 Execute icon. Confirm the reconciliation key to be created. Confirm the billing

documents in the pop-up window. Click on the Log  button to view the log and

results. Note the message which indicates a successful invoice.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 360/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-58

1-2 From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose: 

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service→ Fr ont Off ice/Customer I nteraction Center→ 

Customer Interaction Center

Identify the customer.

1-2-1 In the navigation are on the Environment  tab page, select the contract. Click the

right mouse button to choose Enter customer meter reading . Enter the meterreading results for each individual contract

You have to carry out this process three times.

1-2-2 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Bill ing→ Bi ll ing Execution→ Individual Processing→ 

I ndividual Simulation→ Bil l ing  

1-2-3 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Bill ing→ Bi ll ing Execution→ Individual Processing→ 

I ndividual Bill  

1-3 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Bil ling→ Bi ll ing Execution → Display Document  

1-3-1 Choose the F4 help in the Document no. field.

Enter your business partner number.

The system offers all the billing document for the customer for selection.

Select the most recent document by double-clicking on it.

1-3-2 On the Header Data tab page you can see the most important billing data.

1-3-3 On the Document Overview tab page you can see an overview of the billing lines.

1-3-4 ZWATER Energy price

000004 Rental price

IQUANT Quantities (meter readings)

1-3-5 The billing quantity is visible both in the table overview and in the individual

documents.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 361/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-59

1-4

1-4-1 True.

Billing processes the meter reading results and provides the prices of valuated

quantities for invoicing.

1-4-2 False.

The billing simulation is only a demonstration of how the real billing would becarried out.

The billing simulation produces simulation documents that can only be used for

simulating invoices.

1-4-3 False.

The billing order results from the creation of the meter reading order.

 Billable status is granted when a billing-relevant meter reading exists.

The result of billing are invoice orders.

1-4-4 True.

In contrast to billing documents, billing simulation documents can only be

 processed further by invoicing simulation.1-4-5 True.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 362/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-60

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 363/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-61

Solutions

Unit: Billing and Invoicing

Topic: Invoicing a Business Partner

2-1 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ I nvoicing→ Execute I nvoicing→ Individual Processing→ 

Create Bi l l  

2-1-1 Select the Document Simulated  checkbox.

2-1-2 Start the simulation.

2-1-3 Once the simulation is complete, choose Display Document .

You can also call the print document using the following SAP Easy Access

menu path:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ I nvoicing→ Execute I nvoicing→ Display Print

Document  

2-1-4 Choose the Simulate Bi ll  button.

2-2 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ I nvoicing→ Execute I nvoicing→ Individual Processing→ Create Bi l l  

2-2-1 Identify the business partner.

Enter a reconciliation key.

2-2-2 Once the invoicing has been completed successfully, you can display the log.

2-2-3 Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose:

Uti li ties I ndustry→ Customer Service→ 

Front Off ice/Customer I nteraction Center → Customer I nteraction Center  

Identify the business partner by entering the business partner number in the

 Part. field.

From the Info  action, choose Customer Overview .

Do not exit this display.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 364/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 9-62

2-3

2-3-1 Double click on the bill amount..

You will automatically branch to the print document display.

2-3-2 You can see the number of document line items on the Document Overview  tab

 page.

2-3-3 On the Header Data  tab page you can see the bill total in the Amount  field.

2-3-4 Choose Document Overview . 

In the Rate  column, you can see the rate used in the calculation.

On the Document L ine I tems  tab page, scroll to different document line items

using F6  Previous L ine  and F7 Next L ine. 

 Note the different document line item types.

2-3-5 Choose the Header Data  tab page.

The Net Due Date  field contains the due date for the bill.

2-4

2-4-1 True.

Invoicing processes the meter reading results and the contract accounting data

and, using this information, generates the bill and the new budget billing plan.

2-4-2 False.

With each contract in a contract account, you can specify

whether it is to be billed together with other contracts

or billed separately.

2-4-3 True.

2-4-4 False.

The posting date, as well as the document or system date, can be used as the

 baseline date for calculating the billing due date.

2-4-5 True.

2-4-6 True.

2-4-7 False.

Depending on the budget billing procedure, the final invoice amount is

determined by clearing the statistically posted budget billing amounts or by

including the outstanding partial bills.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 365/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-1

SAP AG 2003

Contents:

Energy Data Management

Overview

Profile Header 

Profile Allocation for Register 

Point of delivery

Profile Values

Formula Profiles

Synthetic Profiles

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 366/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-2

SAP AG 2006

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe functions and content of EDM

Describe the components that make up profiles

Explain how profiles are allocated to the masterdata

Energy Data Management: Unit Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 367/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-3

SAP AG 2003

Values determined by automated meter reading for

an interval meter should be copied to the system

Energy Data Management: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 368/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-4

SAP AG 2009

Components of Energy Data Management

Consumption Price Charge

On-Peak kWh 100 kWh $0.25 $25.00

Off-Peak kWh 400 kWh $0.10 $40.00

Spot kWh 100 kWh $0.50 $50.00

 Amount Due $115.00

John Smith

10 Park Avenue

New York 

Billing period

05.01. – 06.01.

Settlement

EDM

? Historicprofiles

? Price profiles

? Forecastprofiles

BillingProfileManagement

kW

60

30

10

Spot price Additional

agreement:Spot delivery

Agreed price

 

  Energy Data Management (EDM) allows you to manage consumption data that is measured in

intervals (load profile and load shape), as well as the related business processes.

  EDM enables you to bill load shapes using RTP (real-time pricing) and time-of-use rates.

  EDM allows the settlement of all interval meters and points of delivery that are not measured by

load shape:

  Settlement processes

  Amounts and charges

  Procurement schedules and profiles

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 369/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-5

SAP AG 2009

Structure of Energy Data Management

Auto. MRsystems

IntervalMeter 

Meterreading

document

Customermeter 

reading

M  D E  

Point ofdelivery

   D  e  r   i  v  e   d

   l  o  a   d  p  r  o   f   i   l  e  s  S  i

 g  n a  l  D o

  w  n  l o

 a d

   S    i  g 

   n   a    l

 D a t a

 e n t r y   D o w  n l  o a d  

U   p l  o a d  

Data entry

Print

MRdata

mgmt

     E     D     M

Load

profilemgmt

Auto. MRsystems

Auto. MRsystems Invoicing

Real-Time-PricingPrelim.billing

Public network

EDIFACT

   I   M   P   O   R   T

   E   X   P   O   R   T

Consumptionmeter 

Billing

DeviceManagement

Other 

modules

    D  o   w   n    l  o

  a   d

D  a  t  a  e  n  t  r   y  

ContractA/R & A/P

Scheduling

control

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 370/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-6

SAP AG 2009

Energy Data Management and Billing

Variant-based billing

Differentiation of various rate periods using registers

Consumption billing for each register (for each rate period)using billing rules of varying complexity

Cost estimates derived from basic formulas

High billing throughput

Profile-based billing

Differentiation between fixed intervals of measurement (such as,15 min, 30 min, 1hr)

Measurement using interval meters

Consumption billing for each interval inaccordance with interval-specific conditions

Billing complies with the typicaltable calculation procedure

Low billing throughput

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 371/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-7

SAP AG 2006

Profile TypeHistorical profile, schedule profile, formula profile, forecastprofile, synthetic profile, day profile

Consistency check groupDetermines the checks that are executed when profile valuesare imported

Replacement Value GroupDetermines the calculation of plausible values that are usedinstead of missing or implausible values

Validity period

Profile value category

 Amount, factor, quantity, demand, price, other  Interval length

5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes

Profile Header 

 

  Characteristics for profile values are determined in the header data of a profile.

  Once the profile header has been saved, only the description, the consistency check group, the

replacement value procedure group, and the authorization group can be changed.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 372/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-8

SAP AG 2006

Profile Allocation for Register 

Measuredprofile

Measuredprofile

Regionalstructure

Regionalstructure

Contractaccount

Contractaccount

Businesspartner 

Businesspartner 

InstallationInstallation

ContractContract

Register Register 

DeviceDevice

PremisePremise

Connectionobject

Connectionobject

Profiles can be allocated to(logical) registers of interval

meters This allocation is historical and

role-based

The role determines the profile'stask for this register 

Examples of roles aremeasurement and forecast

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 373/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-9

SAP AG 2003

Point of delivery

MeasuredProfile

MeasuredProfile

Contractaccount

Contractaccount

Businesspartner 

Businesspartner 

InstallationInstallation

ContractContract

Register Register 

DeviceDevice

Point ofdelivery

Point ofdelivery

Point to which a utility service issupplied or to which a utility servicecan be determined for a customer 

A point of delivery has one externalidentification number at any time(point of delivery descriptionaccording to metering code, forexample)

The point of delivery is used forcommunication in automatic dataexchange

The point of delivery is used toexchangemeter reading results

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 374/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-10

SAP AG 2009

Import Profile Values

Profile

I  n t   er f   a c e

Meterreadingresult

EDI

PoD

Other 

market part ic ipant 

Intervalmeter 

Signal

Download

For example:Siemens meteringFröschl

Görlitz

For example,MSCONS

SAP Utilities /EDM

AMRsystem

Conversion

EDI

sub-system

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 375/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-11

SAP AG 2003

Profile Values

A profile value is saved for every interval

At least one status is saved for every profile value

Multiple versions can be managed for every profile

Profile values can be displayed in table or in graphical form

Profile values can be changed individually or for certain periodsof time

Profile values can be imported using BAPI or IDoc

An OLE (Excel) interface exists

Profile values can be displayed on the web

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 376/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-12

SAP AG 2009

Formula Profiles

100

0

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

   1   /   4   h   d  e  m  a  n   d   (   k   W   )

18.01. 1995 19.01. 199 5 20.01. 1995 21.01. 199 517.01.1995

        0        0      :        0        0

        1        2      :        0        0

        1        2      :        0        0

        1        2      :        0        0

        1        2      :        0        0

        0        0      :        0        0

        0        0      :        0        0

        0        0      :        0        0

EDM

+

+

+

request

request

UI

UI

UI

UIrest load

RL = TL -NL -SL - MC

elementary l oad profile

aggregated load profile

formula-based profile

scheduling

automatic

+

TLtotal load

NLnet losses

SLstreet lights etc.

MCmeasured customers

PoD

UI

request

request+

+

 

  Formula profiles are used to calculate profile values on the basis of a functional connection.

  You should use formula profiles if the relationship of input parameters

to output parameters rarely changes (for the grid energy-feeding curve, for example).

  Formula profiles allow automatic calculation depending on the input parameters.

  The calculation is scalable.

  User-defined formulas can be added.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 377/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-13

SAP AG 2009

Synthetic Profiles

Residentialcustomer 

Working daySummer 00:00 24:00

Weekend

Working dayWinter 

Weekend

00:00 24:00

00:00 24:00

00:00 24:00

Sun 03.28 Sat 04.03 Sun 04.04Mon 03.29 Tue 03.30 Wed 03.31 Thu 04.01 Fri 04.02 Mon 04.05 Tue 04.06

Week-

end

Winter Summer  

Working day Working day Weekend Working day

 

  Synthetic profiles are used where an interval measurement does not take place.

  Synthetic profiles are profiles whose values are generated based on predefined periods (defined

using blocks of days and seasons) and the allocated day or annual profiles.

  Synthetic profiles are used for classifying customers or customer groups.

  Synthetic profiles are allocated at installation level.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 378/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-14

SAP AG 2006

 You are now able to:

Describe the components that make up profiles

Explain how profiles are allocated to the masterdata

Energy Data Management: Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 379/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-15

Exercises

Unit: Energy Data Management

Topic: Profile Management

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Display profiles

•  Determine and interpret profiles

Gain an overview of the EDM component.

1-1 Display the profile header allocated to business partner TR0101A0## .

1-1-1 What is the status of the profile header?

 ____________________________________________________________

1-1-2 What is the profile type of the profile header?

 ____________________________________________________________

1-2 Which role has been allocated to the profile of business partner TR0101A0## .

To which device is the profile allocated?

 ____________________________________________________________

1-3 Display the profile values.

What is the highest profile value?

Enter 10.01.YYYY  - 10.31.YYYY  as the selection criteria (YYYY  = current year).

Display the profile graphically.

 _________________________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 380/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-16

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 381/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-17

Solutions

Unit: Energy Data Management

Topic: Profile Management

1-1 Display the profile header allocated to business partner TR0101A0## .

Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose: 

Uti l iti es I ndustry Energy Data Management Prof i le Management Prof il e

Header Display

Enter the business partner and choose Continue.

Double click on the profile.The profile header is now displayed on the right of the screen.

1-1-1 What is the status of the profile header?

In the Status field, click on the icon .

1-1-2 Which profile type is assigned?

The historical profile type is allocated to the profile.

1-2 Which role is allocated to the profile for business partner TR0101A0## ?

To which device is the prof i le allocated?  

Go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose: 

Uti li ties I ndustry Energy Data Management Profi le Management Profi le Al location

Enter the business partner and choose Continue.

Double-click on the profile.

You can now see the allocated role on the right of the screen.

1-3 Display the profile values.

What is the highest profile value?

Enter 10.01.YYYY  – 10.31.YYYY  as the selection criteria (YYYY  = current year).

Display the profile graphically.

Uti l iti es I ndustry Energy Data Management Prof i le Management Prof i le Values

Enter the business partner and the selection date.

Select the profile. The profile values now appear on the right of the screen. In the upper

screen area, select the column containing the profile values and execute the sorting

function .

Display the values graphically by selecting the graphic icon.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 382/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 10-18

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 383/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-1

SAP AG 2009

Real-Time-Pricing

Contents:

RTP Overview

RTP Interface Structure

RTP Interface Components

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 384/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-2

SAP AG 2009

Real-Time-Pricing: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the Real-Time-Pricing interfaceand its components

Explain the connection of the RTP interfaceto SAP Utilities billing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 385/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-3

SAP AG 2009

Values determined by automated meter reading for

an interval meter should be billed in the system

Real-Time-Pricing: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 386/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-4

SAP AG 2009

RTP Overview

EDI / XML

Loadshape

System 

Intervalmeter 

Signal

Download

MSCONS

EDM RTPInterface

Billing

Other modules

Schedulingcontrol

Contractaccounting

Invoicing

Devicemanage

ment

Customer/

contractdata

SAP Utilities

PoD(OBIS indicator)

AMRsystem

  The RTP interface is the link between the following SAP Utilities components:

  Energy Data Management (EDM)

  Contract Billing (BI)

  The RTP interface is used to prepare the profiles managed in EDM for billing.

  For this purpose, the RTP interface need to be allocated to the rate at which an interval meter is

 billed.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 387/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-5

SAP AG 2009

RTP Interface

Allows time series, such as load shapes, to be billed

Uses the load shape data directly from EDM

Is fully integrated with SAP Utilities Billing

Allows flexible modeling of nonresidential customer andmajor customer billing using interval reading

Is easily extendable (customer-specific formulas and resultfunctions)

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 388/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-6

SAP AG 2009

RTP Billing

Period-related billing

Time-of-use group (on/off-peak rates)

Day groups (week day/weekend day)

Season groups (summer/winter)

Use of a spot price or an index price

Determination of demand values (highest demand, forexample)

Inclusion of other profiles for billing

Determination of consumption groups

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 389/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-7

SAP AG 2009

RTP Billing Example

E01 Load shape: Quant i ty 

E03 Limit 2: Quant i ty 

E02 Limit 1: Quant i ty 

A03 Over limit 2: Quant i ty 

A04 Over limit 1: Demand A02 Over limit 1: Quant i ty 

A01 To limit 1: Quant i ty 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 390/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-8

SAP AG 2009

RTP Billing Data Model

Installationstructure

Logical register 

Installation

Rate cat.

Rate type

Rate det.Rates

VarProg.

Billing schema

Rate 1Step 1Step 2

Rate nStep 1

VarProg.Example: Quantity x price

Comparison of two demands

Operand values1000kWh, 0.25 UNI

400kW, 300kWProfile

Individual RTPinterface

PI

RTP Interface

...

P1

P2

P12

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 391/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 392/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-10

SAP AG 2009

In

x1

Formula

yn = f(x1,x2,... xm)

Out

y1

y2

Components

Component control:

RTP Interface Structure II

Season type

Day type

Day time type

Active/InactiveDD.MM.YYYY.HH.MM - DD.MM.YYYY.HH.MM

Pr1 = x1

Components

y1 -> e1;e2

y2 -> e3

Result function

e1 < sum >

e2 < sum >

e3 < peak >

Facts

quantity = e1;e2

demand = e3=

RTP interface

EDM profile

management

IS-U

billing

Profile

Legend

x: Input parameter  y: Output parameterse: Result parameter  quantity: consumption

pr: profilef: formulademand: demand

 

  The RTP component defines the structure of parameter allocations.

  Example: You want to make parameter allocations separately according to on-peak and off-peak

rate times. In order to do this, you define a time of use group that divides the day into on-peak

and off-peak times.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 393/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 394/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-12

SAP AG 2009

Formula definition

Formula

Input

Profile

Limit 1

Limit 2

Virtual

Profile

Virtual

Profile

Virtual

Profile

Function Module

yn = f(x1,x2, … xn )

x1

x3

x2

y1

y3

y2

OutputFormula

 

  The formula is the basis of profile calculation on which the RTP calculations are based.

  The formula is allocated to an RTP interface.

  It contains a fixed number of input and output parameters depending on the formula.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 395/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-13

SAP AG 2003

y1

e1

e2

e1 sum QUANTe2 average DEMANDe3 peak DEMAND

Result Function Op. Cat.

Result

Summer 

On-peak

Weekend

Off-peak

On-peak

Workday

Off-peak

Winter 

On-peak

Weekend

Off-peak

On-peak

Workday

Off-peak

Components

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 396/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-14

SAP AG 2003

Transfer of Results to RTP Operand

IS-U billing schema:IS-U billing schema:

y1

result function Op. Cat.

e1 sum QUANT

e2 average DEMAND

e3 peak DEMAND

Rate: ON_OFF_PEAK

RegOperand

RTP-Interface ON_OFF_PEAK

001 ....

... ...

007 QUANTI01 ONPEAKCON ... Pricing for ON Peak consumption

008 QUANTI01 OFFPEAKCON ... Pricing for OFF Peak consumption

... ...

y1 = Output parameter

e1 = Event parameter 

 

  Result parameters can be allocated to an output parameter.

  Result parameters describe the result of an RTP interface once it has been executed. The values of a

result parameter are defined using the result function.

  The discrete result parameter is used as an operand in the rate (by allocating it to an operand).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 397/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 398/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 11-16

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 399/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 12-1

SAP AG 2009

Budget Billing Plan

Contents:

Budget billing procedure

Determination and requirements of budget billing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 400/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 401/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 12-3

SAP AG 2009

A customer's consumption pattern has changed.

After adjusting the period consumption, you

recalculate the budget billing plan.

Budget Billing Plan: Business Scenario

 

  Budget billing plans can be created automatically during the movein process, or manually in a

standalone process.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 402/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 403/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 404/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 12-6

SAP AG 2009

Budget Billing Plan Overview

Manual

calculation

Clearing

Budget BillingPlan

Budget

billing cycle

Amount

limits

Amount

rounding

Amount adjustment factor 

Due date

determination

Automaticdetermination

Min.

amount

Print

Grouping of budget billing amounts from one billing period

Allocation of budget billing amounts to individual contracts

Display of accumulated and individual budget billing amounts

Display of the open budget billing amounts

Automatic and manual determination of the budget billing amount

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 405/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 12-7

SAP AG 2009

Creating or Adjusting Budget Billing Plans

Business Processes

For move-in

For periodic billing Extrapolation

For invoicing Budget billing plan

Amount Determination

Manual calculation

Automatic extrapolation

Due Date of Budget Billing Amounts

Terms of payment from the contract account

Due date

Grouping of contracts

Amount check

 

  Utility companies often only bill for their services at the end of a supply period (with annual

consumption billing, for example).

  Therefore, to maintain liquidity during the current period, budget billing amounts are billed by

anticipating the total amount owed by the customer.

  The budget billing plan defines the dates and size of the budget billing amounts

and forms the basis for budget billing.

  Budget billing plans are normally created automatically (during invoicing or move-in, for example).

However, you can also create them manually.

  Contracts that must be invoiced together are assigned a joint budget billing plan. All other contracts

 belonging to the contract account can have an individual budget billing plan.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 406/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 12-8

SAP AG 2006

20062006

01.11. .... .... .... .... .... .... 01.08.

Billing period20072007

01.09. .... .... .... .... .... .... 01.14.

Budget billing period

Actualmeter reading

Extrapolation of consumption usingconfigured weighting procedure;billing simulation for this period

Next scheduledmeter reading datefrom scheduling

Distribution of total simulated amountover the budget billing due dates

Distribution of total simulated amountover the budget billing due dates

Quantity-Based Extrapolation

 

  Billing calculates the consumption up until the next scheduled meter reading date. Simulated billing

is carried out for the budget billing period. The budget billing items created in this way are

transferred to invoicing in the billing document. Invoicing accepts these amounts and distributes

them to the individual budget billing due dates.

  For this reason, ensure you have generated schedule records for the next billing period before you

simulate billing.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 407/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 408/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 12-10

SAP AG 2009

Budget Billing Plan: Summary

 You are now able to:

Explain the difference between a budget billingplan and a payment plan

Create and change budget billing plans

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 409/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 410/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-2

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Describe the document structure in contractaccounts receivable and payable

Provide information on customer accounts

Explain some common business transactions inContract Accounts Receivable and Payable andperform them in the system.

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable: UnitObjectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 411/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-3

SAP AG 2003

Document structure and posting

Display account balance

Payment for account balance

Process returns and post charges

Dunning for the contract account

Arrangement of installment plan

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 412/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-4

SAP AG 2009

Overview

Documents

 Account display

Payments

Returns

Dunning

Installment plan

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Overview

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 413/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-5

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Integration

BusinessInformationWarehouseCO-PA

TR-CM

CO

SDInvoicing

FI-GL

SAP UTInvoicing

Ext.Billing

Systems

Customer RelationshipManagement

FI-CA

FSCM

 

  You can transfer SD invoices directly to FI-CA subledger accounting. Under certain conditions you

can also post SD invoices as invoicing requests, together with an IS-U invoice.

  Print documents from external billing systems can be imported to FI-CA using a standardized IDoc

interface and processed there.

  Postings in FI-CA trigger an immediate posting in Cash Management (TR-CM).

  Postings in FI-CA are transferred regularly (for example, daily) to the general ledger.

  Additional account assignments from cost accounting are included, and forwarded to the account

assignment objects. The component CO-PA is supplied with the necessary information from the IS-

U invoicing component for different update types. This information is transferred regularly using

transfer reports that are triggered in FI-CA or IS-U.  The integration in Financial Supply Chain Management (FSCM) improves customer-oriented

 processes. Business partners can use the Biller Direct component to check bills and initiate

 payments (as well as other functions) on the Internet. The Credit Management component allows

companies to create and check credit profiles.

  FSCM was integrated with ERP 2005, which means that a separate instance is no longer required.

  Extractors for open and cleared FI-CA items, and for other debit-relevant information, were

developed for the Business Information Warehouse (BW).

  Integration in Customer Relationship Management (CRM) makes it possible to efficiently process

transactions in the Call Center.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 414/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-6

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable is the FI-CA component(Financial Accounting-Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable)

FI-CA is designed and executed as a subledger for customerprocessing

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payableand FI-CA

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 415/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-7

SAP AG 2009

FI-CA Open Architecture

FIFI--CACA

Open itemsPosting information

InformationBusiness processes,

Workflow

Data Exchange

SAPUT

SAPUT

SAPTEL

SAPTEL

IS-IS/CDIS-IS/CD Other Other 

 

  IS-IS-CD: Insurance Industry Component:

Industry Specific Component - Insurance - Collections/Disbursements

  IS-T: Industry Specific Component Telecommunications

  Other industries: Public Sector and Media

  As of Release 4.64, the component FI-CAx has been delivered as an industry-independent solution

of Financial Supply Chain Management.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 416/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 417/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-9

SAP AG 2009

Business partner 

Contains central data, such as names, addresses,

communication data and bank details.

Represents a natural or legal person with whombusiness relationships can be conducted.

Contract account

Contains control data, such as payment methods,terms of payment and dunning procedures.

Object, for which open item accounting is managed inContract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Usually represents a group of contracts(industry-specific).

Contract (industry-specific)

Documents and items

FI-CA Central Objects

BP

Account Account

ContractContractContract

IS-U

FI-CA

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 418/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-10

SAP AG 2009

   I  n  v  o   i  c   i  n  g

   G  e  n  e  r  a   l

   l  e   d  g  e  r

Item (cleared)OP (not due) OP (due) -- Time

Account display

Archiving

Payment (cash payer, direct debit payer)

   S  e  v  e  r  a   l   O   P  s

   I  n   t  e  r  e  s   t

   N  e  w

   d  u  e   i   t  e  m

   C   h  a  r  g  e  s

   O  r   i  g   i  n  a   l   O   P

   O  r   i  g

   i  n  a   l   O   P   /   C   h  a  r  g  e  s

Returns

Deferral

Dunning

Interest calc.

Write Off 

Doubtful entryInd. val. adj.

Installm.plan

FI-CA Business Transactions

Collection Agency

 

  Archiving is only executed for cleared items.

  General ledger transfer occurs at regularly scheduled intervals – defined by the customer.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 419/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 420/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-12

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the document structure in contractaccounts receivable and payable

Post receivables items

Documents: Aims

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 421/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-13

SAP AG 2008

Documents: Introduction

If business processes are not integrated with SAUtilities or SD, or automatically connected toContract Accounts Receivable and Payable by aninterface, individual postings can be entered intothe system as manual documents.

Examples include rent receivables, leasereceivables, as well as receivables for an energyconsultant.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 422/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 423/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-15

SAP AG 2009

G/L

items

G/L

itemsG/Litems

Business partner 

items

Business partner 

itemsBusiness partner items

Documents in Contract Accounts Receivableand Payable

Business partner items

Document header 

G/Litems

1:N 1:N

 

  The basis for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable is the document with

•  Document header

This contains the data that is valid for all line items, such as document date, posting date,

reconciliation key.

•  Business partner items (receivables lines or reconciliation lines)

These contain all data relevant for payment transactions or dunning and the receivables account

or reconciliation account which is debited or credited.

•  G/L account item (revenue lines)

This contains the data for the profit and loss statement, data for sales tax, as well as any

additional account assignments for cost accounting

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 424/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-16

SAP AG 2009

Document Header Data

General

• Document date• Document type• Document number 

Reference andcurrency• Reference• Currency• Conversion rules

Document header 

General ledger 

• Posting date• Reconciliation key• Single document

Management data

• Created by• Date entered• Origin

Additional data

• Reversal document• Reversed with• Returns reason

 

  As with all SAP transactions and documents, the userid of the creator and the date/time of creation

are stored.

  The origin key is an internal identifier which designates the process which created the document.

  Origin keys are provided by SAP and are not changeable.

  If the document is reversed, the original document is updated.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 425/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-17

SAP AG 2003

Header Data: General Document Data

General

• Document date• Document type• Document number 

Document header 

 

  The document date indicates the issue date of the original document.

  Document types

•  Distinguish between business transactions

•  Control document storage using the number range allocated. The document number is

determined during posting by the number range.

•  Are valid for a single client

•  Examples of document types are: AB Miscellaneous document, GB Fees, FA Invoicing.

  Document number:

•  Key, which identifies the document in the contract account receivable and payable for each

client.

•  Depending on the type of number assignment, the document number is assigned automatically by

the system when the document is posted, or is preset externally when the document is entered.

•  The type of number assignment is decided by the document type entered in the document header.

It specifies:

-  A number range from which the document number is chosen.

-  Whether the number is entered automatically or manually.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 426/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-18

SAP AG 2003

General

• Document date• Document type• Document number 

Document Header: Reference and Currency

Reference andcurrency

• Reference• Currency• Conversion rules

Document header 

 

  The r eference document number can contain the business partner document number or the number

of the causal print document from IS-U Invoicing and can be used as search criteria. In

correspondence, the reference document number is sometimes printed in place of the document

number.

  The transaction currency is the key of the currency, in which the document was posted.

  Exchange rate 

Exchange rate used for the conversion between the transaction currency and the local currency. The

exchange rate is saved at the item level.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 427/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-19

SAP AG 2003

General

• Document date• Document type• Document number 

Reference andcurrency

• Reference• Currency• Conversion rules

Document header 

Document Header: Link to General LedgerAccounting

General ledger 

• Posting date• Reconciliation key• Single document

 

  Posting date: The date on which the document was posted in Contract Accounts Receivable and

Payable. The posting date may be different to the entry date (date of entry in the system) and the

document date (date on which the original document was created).

  Reconciliation key for G/L accounting: Key, in which the summary records of Contract Accounts

Receivable and Payable were written for transfer to downstream accounting.

The key is entered as an external reference in the document header field "reference key" of the G/L

account documents the summary records are transferred to the general ledger. This means that

itemization of the totals posted in the general ledger is possible.

You must assign the key for manual postings. For mass processing, the key is assigned by the

 program that executes processing (such as a payment run).

  Document items belonging to one summary record are summarized. If you do not want a summary,you can select single document or single item in the corresponding field for each document. This

document is saved in the G/L document as a single document item.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 428/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-20

SAP AG 2003

Additional data-Item text-Grouping

-Period key

Clearing data

Due dates:Net/Cash

discount/deferral

Alternativepartner forpayments

Dunning data/Interest

calculation

Payment data

Repetitionspecifications

Business partner Contract account

Contract

Company codeProcess

Amounts

Mandatory dataentries

Optional dataentries

Cash managementand forecast data

Set automatically

Data on Business Partner Item

Business partner items

 

  Item text can be used both internally and externally. To differentiate between these, texts for

external use must begin with "*". This can then be specified on all correspondence, such as dunning

notices and payment advice notes. The asterisks are automatically removed when the document is

 printed.

  A grouping key can be assigned to any document items that should be depicted as one item in lists,

correspondence and account processing (incoming payment).

  The period key can be used, for example, if details about the billing period that the receivable

relates to are to be included in the correspondence. The required key can be entered as an alternative

to saving a long text for each item.

  Repetition specifications save memory space required for repetitive document items that only differ

according to when they are due, for example, installment plan or budget billing plan items. Therepetition items appear as 'normal' in the account balance display.

   Not every document needs a business partner. One example of this is a normal payment that leads to

clearing of the affected receivables lines. In this case, only a document header and general ledger

item is written for the payment, since the data relevant for the account assignment comes from the

receivables lines that linked the payment.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 429/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-21

SAP AG 2003

Amountsand taxcode

Accountassignment for subsequentaccounting

General ledger:company code,G/L account

Data on G/L Account Item

G/L

items

 

  Value date: Day when values are set.

The value date indicates the day on which the financial transaction actually took place in financial

accounts (bank accounts, bank sub-accounts). The value date is the decisive date for displaying daily

financial status and liquidity forecast in cash management.

  A planning level is allocated in the document item of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

for updating in cash management. The planning level is valuated in the liquidity forecast.

  The tax transaction determines which type of tax is used. The keys are defined in the system and

cannot be changed. The transaction key is for documenting the tax type after transfer into R/3

general ledger accounting.

Automatic determination of tax accounts is performed using the transaction key.

  In some cases FI-CA documents do not contain G/L items. These are statistical documents. Statistical posting simplifies the administration of doubtful receivables as these postings are not

transferred to the general ledger, and are thus easier to reverse if they are not paid. Budget billing

receivables are a typical example, as in most cases, there is no bill and the collection of payment, if

 payment is not made, is less likely than in cases where a bill exists. In the case of statistical budget

 billing amounts, the value added tax is also due with the first payment of the budget billing amount

and, as a result, when the receivable is posted in the general ledger. Dunning charges are another

example that are generally not paid.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 430/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-22

SAP AG 2003

General data Entry control

General

• Document date• Document type• Document number 

Reference andcurrency

• Reference• Currency• Conversion rules

General ledger 

• Posting date• Reconciliation key• Single document

• Clearing reason• Entry variants• Company code• Screen variants• Calculate taxes• Jurisdiction code• Net receivables

Data Entry: Header Data and Default Values

Document header 

 

  The entry variant controls which fields are to be hidden for posting, changing, and displaying a

document. This allows you to customize screens for the business transaction (such as a down

 payment).

  The calculation of taxes means that the system automatically calculates taxes using the

specifications in the business partner items during simulation or posting. If you do not set the

indicator, you have to enter the tax lines separately.

  Default value for company code 

•  Where no company code is entered, the default company code is added to each document line

item. The company code is an entry aid for documents or line items that are to be posted in the

same company code.

•  The user settings allow you to block cross-company code posting. If this setting has been made,

users must enter a company code.

  The clearing reason is saved in the cleared line items and can be displayed during analysis of the

single items (such as in the account balance display). If you clear items using the function  Post

document , you must specify a clearing reason here. You can define a default value in Customizing.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 431/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-23

SAP AG 2003

Receivables / credit memos

Automatic determination of

general ledger accounts and taxaccounts using transactions

Classification using documenttype

Automatic determination of duedates using terms of payment inthe contract account

Receivables or credit can becleared immediately

Business partner BP1

Contract account CA 1Amount $ 100

Business partner BP2Contract account CA2Amount $ 150

Business partner BP3Contract account CA3Amount $ 250

Data Entry: Items

 

  Receivables and credit memos can be entered manually. During posting, a transaction that is defined

in the system is specified for each business transaction. In this way, the general ledger accounts are

automatically determined and put into the receivables and revenue lines. The same occurs for tax

codes and tax accounts.

  Due dates are determined automatically using the terms of payment in the contract account.

  Receivables and credit memos can also be cleared either immediately or partially.

  Receivables lines can be repeated with different due dates with specification of a start date at

monthly or daily intervals (for example, for distributing a receivable amongst payment plans).

  The document items of a document do not have to belong to the same business partner. Posting to

different business partner is possible.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 432/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-24

SAP AG 2003

Transactions explain the business transactionon which the posting of a line item is based.

A transaction is a combination of main and sub-transactions

Texts for the transactions explain the business transaction andare available for correspondence

Transactions control FI-CA account determination

Transactions control FI-CA value added tax determination

FI-CA uses internal main and sub-transactions, which areassigned internally by various FI-CA business processes. Thetransactions also control these business processes.

Transactions in Contract Accounts Receivable andPayable

 

  Example in IS-U for

•  Main transaction: periodic billing

•  Sub-transaction: receivable from energy charge

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 433/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-25

SAP AG 2003

Main transaction Sub-transaction

Billing Energy charge receivable

Energy charge credit

Clearing price receivable

Clearing price credit

Service charge receivable

Service charge credit

Charges Statistical dunning charge

Dunning charge

Charge for items in installment plan

Examples of Transactions

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 434/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-26

SAP AG 2003

1. Doc.: Amount $ 580Net $ 500Tax $ 80

2. Doc.: Amount $ 116Net $ 100Tax $ 16

Reconciliation key: 98126ISU01

Documentposting

FI-CA documents

D 140000 $ 696C 800000 $ 600C 175001 $ 96

Reconciliation key98126ISU01

SummaryRecord

Generatepostings

FI documents

40 140000 696,--

50 800000 600,--50 175001 96,--Reference key

98126ISU01Reference transaction

FKKSU

Transfer to General Ledger Accounting

 

  The reconciliation key is the key used to record totals records.

  The reference key is derived from the reconciliation key, stored in the the general ledger document

header and can be used to trace the original subledger documents for general ledger documents.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 435/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-27

SAP AG 2003

Transfer unit for postings from Contract Accounts Receivable andPayable to financial accounting

Single documents from Contract Accounts Receivable andPayable are grouped into summary records if:

Summarization was not prevented manually

They have the same reconciliation key

They can be grouped according to G/L accounting and subsequentapplication criteria.

Examples for summarization criteria are:

Company code and date

Debit/credit indicator  General ledger account

Currency

Criteria of subsequent systems or components (cost accounting)

Summary Record

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 436/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-28

SAP AG 2009

Documents: Summary I

The most important data in the document header is:

Document number 

Reconciliation key

Posting date

Document date

The business partner item

Is allocated to a business partner 

Contains the amount to be posted

Contains the account assignment forG/L accounting determined by the transaction

The G/L account item contains information on thecorresponding G/L accounts and additional accountassignments.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 437/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-29

SAP AG 2009

Documents: Summary II

If necessary, documents can be posted manuallyin Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable.

This is possible for both receivables and creditmemos.

An item can be entered:

individually in detail, or

in a list

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 438/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-30

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Account Display

Overview

Documents

Account display

Payments

Returns

Dunning

Deferral and installment plans

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 439/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-31

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Analyze the development of a contract account

Provide information on the items of a contractaccount

Use the navigation options in the account balancedisplay

Account Display: Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 440/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 441/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-33

SAP AG 2009

Document structure and posting

Display accou nt b alance 

Payment for account balance

Process returns and post charges

Dunning for the contract account

Arrangement of installment plan

Account Display: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 442/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-34

SAP AG 2003

Selections:

- Business partner, contract account, contract

Company code, installment plan, collective bill, reference

- List category for restricting the items to be displayed according to"status“. Examples: All open, due, or statistical items

- User-specific selections

List representation defines the line structure

Sorting is possible

Account Display: Initial Screen

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 443/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-35

SAP AG 2003

The list category determines which items are selected for theaccount display (such as open items or down payment

requests). The list category enables you to preconfigure frequently used

selections.

As an alternative to selecting items using list categories, youcan select:

 A preset standard, for example, all open, non-statistical items

Define specific items in the detail selection

Even if a list category is used, the selection can still be changed

using "detail". This change is not saved, rather only used for thecurrent display.

Account Display: List Category

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 444/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-36

SAP AG 2003

Determines which fields of a document are included in the

account display.

Different line structure variants can be selected in the account

display. It is also possible to totalize and find values using

particular criteria.

The same output list can be viewed in a number of ways.

Depending on the cursor position, you can branch to the detailed

view of the document items, master data and the posting basis

Account Display: Line Layout

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 445/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-37

SAP AG 2009

Account Display: Balance Variant

Determines which balance groups will be displayed in the

balance grid.

Balance groups are only shown when they contain values .

Balance categories and balance grid are assigned to balance

groups.

The balance grid enables receivable display in aging buckets.

Balance variants and balances are used in SAP CRM to display

open items within the account display view.

 

  Event 1299 controls the calculation of balances.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 446/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-38

SAP AG 2003

OverviewOverview

Header Header 

G/Litemlist

G/Litemlist

BusinessPartner 

itemlist

BusinessPartner 

itemlist

Detail screenof businessof business

partner items

Detail screenof businessof business

partner items

Detail screenof G/Litems

Detail screenof G/Litems

Account Display: Navigating in the DocumentDisplay

 

  It is possible to return to the header display from any screen.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 447/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-39

SAP AG 2003

DocumentDisplayChangeReverseClearing backInstallment planBudget billing planHistories...

Account Display: Navigation and Functions

Basic list

Account

Mass change AccountmaintenanceInstallment plansBudget billing plansDunning noticesCreditworthinessPartner locks

Master data

Business partner - Change contract

account- Change contract

Payment dataFrom payment runFrom payment lotFrom returns documentFrom repayment requestPayment use

 

  The agent can call up all debit processes with changing transactions.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 448/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-40

SAP AG 2009

Account Display: Summary I

Variable item selection

All items / open items / cleared items

(with / without payments)

Statistical items

(all / budget billing plan / charges /...)

User-specific selection conditions

(by due date / by transaction)

Variable display

Line layout variants

User-defined account display

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 449/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-41

SAP AG 2009

Account Display: Summary II

Immediate access to environment data

Document

Business partner / contract account / contract

Payment use

Original receivables for installment plan items

Dunning history

...

Sort and summary functions within the account

display

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 450/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-42

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Payments

Overview

Documents

 Account display

Payments

Returns

Dunning

Installment plan

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 451/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-43

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the processing steps of a payment lot

Post payments using a payment lot

Post payments at cash desk

Payment Run: Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 452/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-44

SAP AG 2006

Utility companies have to deal with large numbers

of incoming payments in a reliable and efficient

manner.

Payment flow reaches the utility company in

various ways. These include data medium

exchange, automatically read documents and other

documents

Background and dialog processes are provided for

processing payments, depending on the situation

Payments: Introduction

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 453/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-45

SAP AG 2003

Document structure and posting

Display account balance

Payment for accou nt b alance 

Process returns and post charges

Dunning for the contract account

Arrangement of installment plan

Payment Run: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 454/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-46

SAP AG 2009

ManualAutomatic

Automatic and Manual Payments

Automatic incomingpayments

Collection procedure

Credit repayment

Returns

Payment lot Payment order lot

Check lot

Credit card lot

Payment at cash desk

Returns lot

 

  Automatic incoming payment: 

Incoming payment data from previous systems, financial institutions, or agencies is processed in

 payment lots. The system automatically creates a payment posting for the corresponding business

 partner. Payments are automatically allocated to one or more receivables items. If an incoming

 payment cannot be allocated to an item, it is possible to post an account at contract account level.

Manual post-processing in the clarification worklist is also possible.

  Collection procedure

Payments are handled by collection or direct debit from financial institutes or credit card companies

and the corresponding output media are created.

  Credit repayment: 

Credit is automatically repaid via check or bank transfer, and the corresponding output media arecreated.

  Returns processing 

Automatic returns processing with workflow link is provided for returned payments from financial

institutions and credit card companies, as well as for returned incoming checks.

  Payments fall into two categories – customer initiated (check mailed, etc) and company initiated

(direct debit, etc).

  Company initiated payments (incoming and outgoing) utilize payment method assigned at account

or item level, and generate payment media to facailitate communication with banking institutions or

check printing.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 455/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-47

SAP AG 2009

The payment lot stores data from external payments.

Payment data is stored in a lot if:

It has the same source

It is to be processed together 

Data for a group of incoming checks is stored in a payment lot.This type of lot is accordingly called a check lot.

Bank transfers and/or debit memos that were received areextracted from an account statement and stored in a payment lot.

Payment Lot

 

  Customer initiated payments are usually processed with the various lot functions (Payment Lot,

Check Lot, etc).

  Lots group payments which are received and processed together.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 456/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-48

SAP AG 2003

Data is saved in the payment lot header if:

It applies to the entire lot

It is used as a default value for items

Payment Lot: Structure I

Header entry

 

  Data that applies to the entire lot:

•  Key

•  Search term

•  Posting date

•  Bank clearing account

•  Company code for the bank posting

•  Reconciliation key for general ledger accounting

• Currency

•  Value date

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 457/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-49

SAP AG 2003

Item 2

Item 1

Header Entry

Data is saved in the payment lot header if:

It applies to the entire lot

It is used as a default value for items

An item is a payment with:

Amount

Specifications for selection of receivables to becleared

Payment Lot: Structure II

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 458/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-50

SAP AG 2009

Payment lot processing includes the following steps:

Create

Change (optional)

Close (deletion and insertion of items is no longer allowed)

Post

Post-processing (for clarification and errors)Post-processing is necessary if postings were generated in an interimaccount, or if it was not possible to make any postings.

Newpayment

lotCreate Close Post

Paymentlot

complete

ChangePost-

processing

Payment Lot: Processing Steps

 

  Payment lots are typically processed automatically via file upload – but can be processed manually.

  FPB3 – report RFKKZE00 - is used to generate payment lot from file.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 459/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 460/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-52

SAP AG 2003

The essential entries are:

Amount

Payment use via selection category and selection value forchoosing open items, which are cleared by payment.

Selection categories are one character abbreviations that are

defined in Customizing.

These include: G for business partner,K for contract account,V for contract

Payment Lot: Create Items

Newpayment

lotCreate Close Post

Paymentlot

complete

 

  Enter one line of data for each payment during list entry. Variants of the line structure can be

recorded in Customizing. You can change the entry variants using the Screen variant key.

  The Details button branches to the detailed view of a selected item. You can enter additional data on

the payment, if required.

  On the detail screen, you can enter any additional data necessary for payment allocation or for

further clarification.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 461/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-53

SAP AG 2003

Items can be deleted and added as long as the payment lot is notclosed.

Data on items that have already been entered can also becorrected.

Interrupted entry of a payment lot can be resumed using this

function.

Newpayment

lotCreate Close Post

Paymentlot

complete

Change

Payment Lot: Change

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 462/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-54

SAP AG 2003

Closing a payment lot means that adding or deleting items is nolonger possible.

Corrections can still be made on the payment lot items afterclosing. You can also re-open a lot

Posting cannot begin until a lot is closed.

Payment Lot: Close

Newpayment

lotCreate Close Post

Paymentlot

complete

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 463/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-55

SAP AG 2003

Postings can either be dealt with in dialog mode or in a backgroundprocess (typical for mass data).

Postings to contract accounts including payment use with:

Clearing of open items and/or 

Generation of payments on account

Posting to an interim account if the payment use is unclear 

A check deposit list can be printed for check lots

Payment Lot: Post

Newpayment

lotCreate Close Post

Paymentlot

complete

 

  The following postings are generated in a posting run:

•  For a check lot:

One summary posting for each lot: incoming checks account to clearing account, and one posting

for clearing account to payment use for each check (optional). The document number of the

check deposit posting is noted in the payment lot header.

•  For other lots: One posting of bank clearing account to payment use or interim account. The

document number is recorded in the associated items in the payment lot.

•  The payment use can consist of different components:

-  Clearing/partial clearing of open items

-  Postings on account

-  Expense/revenue (payment difference)

-  Generation of receivables (charges, interest).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 464/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-56

SAP AG 2003

Determination of the amount available for clearing

Determination of the selection criteria for open items

Open item selection

Conversion of item currency to clearing currency

Distribution of clearing amount to open items (clearing control)

Generation of document items (such as cash discounts, charges,down payments) caused by clearing

Posting of the payment document and noting the clearinginformation in the cleared items

Automatic Clearing: Process

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 465/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-57

SAP AG 2003

If automatic allocation was not possible:

Clarification of payment use and transfer from interim account to acontract account in post processing

Correction of payment items (such as selection specifications)and restart of postings for selected items

Manual posting and clearing selected items

Generation of a repayment request if the payment use cannot bedetermined

Newpayment

lotCreate Close Post

Paymentlot

complete

Post-processing

Payment Lot: Postprocessing

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 466/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-58

SAP AG 2003

Cash journal

Cash structure

Automatic processes

Special functions

Role concepts

Evaluations

 

  You can store your company's cash structure in the cash journal. The cash structure includes the

company cash desks in individual subsidiaries and forms the master data (two-level hierarchy) as

 prerequisite for the cash journal.

  The cash journal offers further functionalities:

•  Automatic processes

-  Default values: Company code, clearing account and lots that have already been created are

 proposed according to payment category. This is also the case for cash structure allocation.

-  Create lot and close

•  Special functions

-  Deposits and withdrawals as G/L account postings

-  Transfer persons responsible (only makes sense when using role concept)

-  Closing cash desk

•  Role concept (head of subsidiary, cashier with special authorization, cashier)

•  Evaluations can be carried out at the moment using the cash balance or historically (for each

subsidiary, cash desk, user...)

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 467/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-59

SAP AG 2003

00000150900 12131400 67291500 11Donot writeinor stampthisfield.

Deutsche Bank

CurrencyAmountPay thebearer 

 Amount inwords

Ortheholder ON

City

Date

Signature

Theprintedchecktextmust not be alteredinanyway.

Checkno.  Account no.X X A mou nt X Sort cod e X Text

New York

1.4.1996

 € -400,--four hundred

Red Cross

ReceiptCheckdeposit list

Postdirectly

Postdirectly

Post indialog

Post indialog

Paymentposting

Paymentposting

Contract account

Payment at cash desk

Business partner 

Contract account

Contract

Document number 

Net due date

Payment form no.

 

  The cash desk is integrated in the cash journal. This means that all incoming and outgoing payments

are posted using the cash desk. You can navigate directly from the cash journal to the cash desk and

from the cash desk to the cash journal. The system transfers the cash desk allocated to an agent and

other settings (determined by the system or made by the user) to the cash desk. If you use the

transaction cash journal , you cannot call the cash desk transaction directly.

  If the cash journal is deactivated, you can only use the cash desk function.

  Within the cash desk function, payments can be directly allocated to open items for a business

 partner.

  You can use a payment proposal from clearing control or assign the payment manually.

  A distinction is made between cash payments and payment by check or credit card. Incoming andoutgoing payments can also be processed.

  A receipt can be printed following the posting.

  If an overpayment is made in cash, the remaining amount is used to decide whether a posting on

account is to be made or whether this amount is to be paid to the customer.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 468/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-60

SAP AG 2003

Open items are displayed:

In a list with one line per item and

In a control block that displays the status of clearing processing

The difference between the clearing amount and the allocatedamount is decisive here

The allocated amount is the sum of the clearing amounts that areallocated to the individual items.

The clearing can be posted if the difference:

Is zero (green light appears)

Is within a predefined tolerance limit (yellow light appears)

Clearing: Dialog Processing

 

  Open item processing: 

By double-clicking in the Amount column, inactive items become active and vice versa. As soon as

an item is active, a value appears in the "Clearing amount” column. The posting amount of the item

is proposed.

The clearing amount can be overwritten (partial clearing). By double-clicking in the Clearing

amount column, the system sets the amount that is necessary to bring the clearing to zero.

Items can also be set to active and inactive in groups. To do this, select the items in the left column

and then press the desired key (active or inactive).

  The processing screen can be reconfigured by pressing the Presentation key.

You can switch between selection mode and command mode. The summarization of items in the

display can be switched on and off.

The line structure (information displayed on open items) can be varied.You can hide or display cash discount fields as well as display posting and clearing amounts as net

or gross. You can change the currency that is displayed.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 469/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-61

SAP AG 2003

Payment can be handled automatically and

manually in Contract Accounts Receivable and

Payable.

Payments are processed:

In payment lots

At the cash desk

In clearing control, you can create detailed

specifications for automatically clearing items,which can be changed during processing in dialog

mode.

Payments: Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 470/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-62

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Returns

Overview

Documents

 Account display

Payments

Returns

Dunning

Installment plan

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 471/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-63

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Describe returns processing

Post a return

Returns: Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 472/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-64

SAP AG 2006

Utility companies must deal with a large number ofincoming and outgoing payments.

A certain percentage of these cannot besuccessfully processed because the account isincorrect, closed, or not covered

The additional workload is kept as low as possibleby:

Reversing payment to the account

Passing on charges

Triggering subsequent activities such ascorrespondence or re-posting after the paymentmethod has been locked for a limited period

Returns: Introduction

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 473/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-65

SAP AG 2003

Document structure and posting

Display account balance

Payment for account balance

Process returns and post ch arges 

Dunning for the contract account

Arrangement of installment plan

Returns: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 474/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-66

SAP AG 2003

Returns reason

Return amountHistory

Return category Number of returns

Returns: Influencing Factors

Customercreditworthiness

and tolerancegroup

Returns

 

  Every return category is allocated to a return reason. Return reasons can have the same category.

The return category determines the accounts used (G/L accounts for returns charges and bank

clearing account).

  Company-specific returns reasons can be allocated bank-specific returns reasons.

  A business partner's creditworthiness provides information on his or her payment behavior.

The creditworthiness value is made up of a manual and an automatic value. The automatic

creditworthiness value is determined by multiplying the credit numbers from credit-relevant

 processes (for example dunning, returns) with the time-dependent credit rating and adding the

results. Creditworthiness is then calculated using the following formula:

Creditworthiness = automatic credit worthiness value x percentage credit factor + manual

creditworthiness  History

Maximum number of days that have passed since an event before the event can be included in the

analysis of the returns history.

•  The return amount is important for:

-  Determining bank charges (the system interprets the difference between the return amount of

the house bank and the original paid amount as a charge, and posts it accordingly)

-  Calculating the company's graduated charges for processing returns

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 475/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-67

SAP AG 2003

Pass on chargeswith/without tax

Returns: Configuration Activities

Returns

Correspondence

Calculate lotcharges

Incomingpayment method

Payment blockreasons

Deferral days

Return amount

Dunning block- Contract account- Items

Post chargesstatistically

 

  Pass on bank charges:

Means that the bank passes on the returns charges to the business partner or the accompanying

contract account. If this is not the case, these charges are paid by the utility company.

  Calculation of lot charge 

Means that the business partner has to pay a surcharge in addition to the bank charges. The amount

of the lot charge depends on the amount of the returns charge.

  By recording a dunning block reason in the master record of Contract Accounts Receivable and

Payable or under open items, the items due for dunning or the open items are not dunned when the

dunning program is executed.

  The new due date for the receivable is calculated using the deferral days according to the following

formula:New due date = document date or return + deferral days 

  Recording a payment block reason for open items means that the open items are blocked for

automatic payment with the payment program.

  Recording a blocking reason for incoming/outgoing payments in the master record of Contract

Accounts Receivable and Payable prevents debit memos/bank collections/payments from being

initiated by the payment program.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 476/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-68

SAP AG 2009

Returns lot processing contains the following steps:

Create

Change (optional)

Close

Post

Postprocessing (for clarification and errors):Postprocessing is necessary if postings could not be carried out.

Newreturns

lotCreate Close Post

Returnslot

complete

ChangePost-

processing

Returns Lot: Processing Steps

 

  Returns lots are typically processed automatically via file upload – but can be processed manually.

  FPB5 – report RFKKRL00 - is used to generate payment lot from file.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 477/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-69

SAP AG 2003

A returns lot can be created:

Using a program (such as returns lot with DTAUS)

In dialog mode

The following must be specified:

Reconciliation key Whether the amount contains charges

Whether the amount contains taxes

Posting type (taking back payment, new receivables)

Newreturns

lotCreate Close Post

Returns Lot: Create

Returnslot

complete

 

  Default values on the header screen:

•  The current date is defined.

•  The last values entered (if available) are inserted automatically for the currency and business

area.

•  Document type, clearing reason, company code and selection category are stored in Customizing

as default

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 478/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-70

SAP AG 2003

The essential entries are:

Amount

Returns reason

Payment document number 

Newreturns

lotCreate Close Post

Returns Entry

Returnslot

complete

 

  Enter one line of data for each return during list entry. Variants of the line structure can be recorded

in Customizing. You can choose other line structures in Extras --> Screen variants 

  By pressing the Additional specifications key, you can branch to the detail screen of the selected

item. You can enter additional data on the payment, if required.

  On the detail screen, you can enter any additional data necessary for payment allocation or for

further clarification.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 479/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-71

SAP AG 2003

Items can be deleted and added if the returns lot is still open.

Data on items that have already been entered can also becorrected.

Interrupted entry of a returns lot can be resumed using thisfunction.

Newreturns

lotCreate Close Post

Change

Returns Lot: Change

Returnslot

complete

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 480/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 481/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-73

SAP AG 2003

 You can decide whether postings are to be managed:

In dialog mode

In a background process

For each return

The payment document and cleared items are determined

All activities stored in Customizing are executed

The returns history is written

Newreturns

lotCreate Close Post

Returns Lot: Post

Returnslot

complete

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 482/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-74

SAP AG 2003

Clarification of return use

Correction of returns item and restart posting for selected items

Manual posting and clearing for selected items

Newreturns

lotCreate Close Post

Post-processing

Returns Lot: Post-processing

Returnslot

complete

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 483/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-75

SAP AG 2003

Basis for future handlingof the contract accountdependent on:Period of examination- Number of returns

Record of businessmanagement data forreturns processing,including:- Amounts- Document numbers

Returns History

Returnshistory

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 484/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-76

SAP AG 2003

The utility company can configure the many settingsin such a way that detailed work is taken care of inthe background.

Some of these activities are:

Reversing the clearing for the contract account

Passing on charges with/without tax

Deferral of receivables

Setting payment and dunning blocks

Triggering correspondence

Returns: Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 485/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-77

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Dunning

Overview

Documents

 Account display

Payments

Returns

Dunning

Installment plan

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 486/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-78

SAP AG 2009

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Describe the two-step dunning process

Display and explain the dunning history of abusiness partner/contract account

Name some of the influential factors in dunning

Describe the differences between classical andflexible dunning.

Dunning: Objectives

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 487/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-79

SAP AG 2006

Customer payments can only be reasonablycontrolled within utility companies if they aresupported by automatic processes.

If payment is delayed, dunning automatically:

Creates a letter customer to the customer 

Executes further activities

Triggers workflows (security requirement,disconnection order)

This is a general procedure and can be adjusted tocompany requirements and individual customers orcustomer groups.

Dunning: Introduction

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 488/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-80

SAP AG 2003

Document structure and posting

Display account balance

Payment for account balance

Process returns and post charges

Dunning for the contract accoun t 

Arrangement of installment plan

Dunning: Business Scenario

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 489/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-81

SAP AG 2009

Dunning: Dunning Proposal and Activities

Businesspartner 

Contractaccount

Openitems

Dunninghistory

Deter-mination of 

new

 dunninglevels

Generatedunningproposal

Generatedunning

activities

Postinterest

and

charges

Charge schedulePrint forms

Amount limits 

Days in arrearsDunning frequency

 

  The dunning program can be executed first as a dunning proposal and then, in a second run, as as a

dunning activity run based on the dunning proposal. Items to be dunned are updated, dunning

notices printed, and other dunning activities are executed in the activity run.

Dunning proposals and activities can also be processed in a program run.

  The dunning proposal can still be processed before the dunning notice is printed.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 490/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-82

SAP AG 2009

Dunning procedure Dunning grouping

Dunning frequencyDays in arrears

Minimum/maximumamounts

Creditworthiness

Dunning: Influential Factors

Dunningprocess

 

  A dunning procedure can be allocated to a contract account or to individual line items in the

document. Items due for dunning are dunned according to the settings in the dunning procedure and

dunning data is stored in the dunning history.

  A dunning can only be triggered in a dunning level if the amount of all due items of a dunning

grouping exceeds the maximum amount stored in the dunning level.

  Days in arrears describes the minimum number of days in arrears that must elapse after the net due

date of a receivable before a dunning letter can be created.

  Another condition for creation of a dunning letter is that the dunning frequency has been reached.

To create another dunning letter, at least the specified number of days must have passed since the

creation date of the last dunning letter.

  Indicator: Always dun dunning level. This means that a dunning letter is always triggered in this

dunning level, as soon as the dunning frequency has been reached, regardless of whether the days in

arrears and the maximum / minimum amount have been reached, or whether the dunning level has

 been raised for any items of the same dunning grouping.

  The dunning grouping determines the criteria with which items due for dunning are additionally

grouped during execution of a dunning run for example, business area, contract account, division, or

contract. Items due for dunning are always grouped according to the following criteria in the

dunning run: business partner, dunning procedure, currency, responsible company code, and

dunning letter recipient.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 491/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-83

SAP AG 2003

Determination of all business partner accounts

Reading the dunning history

Calculation of creditworthiness

Generation of a dunning proposal

The new dunning level is determined

Dunning information is not saved for items

Writing the dunning proposal in the dunning history

Dunning Proposal for a Business Partner 

 

  Possible selection parameters for a dunning proposal:

  General selection criteria:

-  Company code

-  Business partner

-  Contract account

-   Net due date

  Dynamic selection criteria (from the business partner item contract accounting document):

-  Document number

-  Business area

-  Contract

-  Division

-  Document date

-  Posting date

-  Currency

-  All other criteria from the document item can also be used.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 492/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-84

SAP AG 2003

Dunning charges(scale schema)

Dunning activities:Customer letter Disconnection order Deactivate installment plan

Creditworthinessand credit

weighting

Print all items

Payment periodInterest

Dunning Levels

Dunning: Configuration of Dunning Process

Dunningprocess

 

  Every dunning procedure can be made up of different dunning levels. Dunning levels determine

the dunning intervals, the charges schema used for determining the dunning charges and the way in

which interest is calculated and posted. You can also record parameters at every dunning level for

 printing dunning letters, and for currency-dependent minimum/maximum amounts.

  Payment period in days. This is calculated from the dunning issue date and used for the payment

target for a dunning letter.

Payment target = dunning issue date + payment period

  The Print all items indicator means that all due items that meet the same criteria for the dunning

grouping are printed on one dunning letter. Otherwise, only the items due for dunning are printed

(items that have reached the number of days in arrears specified).

  Creditworthiness weighting is the time-dependent factor used to include the credit points of adunning level in creditworthiness calculation.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 493/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-85

SAP AG 2009

Dunning: Determination of Dunning Level

Contractaccount

Dunninghistory

Openitems

Dunning procedureDunning grouping

Due dateAmount

Last dunning dateLast dunning level

Where do the various influencing factors come from?

New dunning level

 

  Items that have not yet been dunned have dunning level 0.

  An open item receives the next highest dunning level if

  more than the defined number of days in arrears have passed since the due date,

  more days have passed since the due date than the number defined for the dunning frequency.

  An item that is dunned more than once passes through the various dunning levels according to

 predefined rules.

  The highest dunning level of all items summarized in a dunning group determines which dunning

activities are performed for the corresponding dunning group.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 494/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-86

SAP AG 2003

Save dunning level for receivables item

Determine and post dunning charges

Determine and post interest

Execute dunning activities

Print dunning letter 

Deactivate installment plan, release for collection

Generate disconnection document

Update dunning history

Dunning Activities for a Business Partner:

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 495/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-87

SAP AG 2009

Dunning: Dunning History

4711 08.01.00 DL 4 $200

4712 08.15.00 DL 4 $150

4713 09.01.00 DL 3 $250

...

4729 01.16.01 DL 1 $120

4711 08.01.00 DL 4 $200

4712 08.15.00 DL 4 $150

4713 09.01.00 DL 3 $250

...

4729 01.16.99 DL 1 $120

4711 08.01.96 DL 4 $200

4712 08.15.96 DL 4 $150

4713 09.01.96 DL 3 $250

...

4729 01.16.97 DL 1 $120

4711 14.11.2009 MS 4 $200

4712 14.12.2009 MS 4 $150

4713 29.12.2009 MS 3 $250

...

4729 25.01.2010 MS 1 $120

Each dunning-relevantitem has an entry

in the dunning history

30.01.2010 1500 $

15.01.2010 1200 $

01.01.2010 800 $

15.12.2009 800 $

Overview of all dunning levels for a business partner /contract account

Identification of the

dunning run

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 496/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-88

SAP AG 2009

New Capabilities for End-to-End CollectionsManagement

Evaluate andAnalyze

Business Rules/Dunning run

ManageCollections Work

ProcessCollections Work

Evaluation ofcollection successper collection step

Evaluation ofpromises-to-pay

 Analysis of workitems / collectors’efficiency

ChampionChallenger

 Analysis

Creatingpromise to pay

Collection factsheet

Extendedcollectionhistory

Flexibledetermination ofthe next collectionstep based onbusi-ness rulesconfigured inBusiness RulesFramework (BRF)

New dunningactivity forcreating workitems

Rule-based, auto-

maticdetermination ofresponsible team/agent

Workloadbalancing

Processing ofwork items ininteraction center,including:

Creating work lists Monitoring work

lists Reassigning work

items betweenagents / teams

Work listmanagement,including:

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 497/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-89

SAP AG 2009

Classical Dunning vs. New Dunning

Dunning by Collection Strategy

 Amount

Days

Dunning level 1

 Amount

Days

Dunning history(last collection step)

Dunningdata

Creditrating

Collection step 2

BusinessRules

Framework

CollectionStrategy

Collection step ? dunning activities

Rules engine determines next collectionstep according to collection strategy forgroup of contract accounts

Dunning by Dunning

Dunning level 2

Dunning level dunning activities

Dunning procedure of contract accountdetermines number and sequence ofdunning levels

 

  Classical dunning is linear process based on the dunning procedure assignment

  Flexible dunning is a dynamic process which allows variable activity determination using criteria

limited only by imagination

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 498/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-90

SAP AG 2009

Dynamic Activity Determination – Example

NextTreatment: L2

Previoustreatment

L1?

Previoustreatment

L2?

L1 – Earlyreminder 

Treatementso far?

High Risk? Medium Risk? ELSE?

Send to legalcollections

Brokenpromises?

Disconnectionnotification

Call customer(L3A)

Final contract? ...

Send to legalcollections

Y N

N N

Y

Y

N Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y High Risk No Risk

 

  An example of a flexible strategy

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 499/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-91

SAP AG 2009

Determination of Collection Activities withBusiness Rules Frame

 Actions

 Action

 Action Action

 Ausdruck Ausdruck

BRFEvent

RegelRegel

Regel

Rule

Expression

Expression Expression

 Action

Expression

IF THEN

 Actions

optional

Flexible, dynamic evaluation of a variety ofparameters

Full customer context available (financial data, IS-Udata, project extensions) without data replication

Linear as well as decision-tree based collectionstrategies

Possibility of integrating manual and automaticactivities

Logic is transparent to the business

Reduces previous programming efforts

Configurable by a key user 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 500/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-92

SAP AG 2009

Dunning by Collection Strategy

Dunning Proposal

1. Business Rules Framework

Business rules evaluation for acontract (account) or group ofcontract (accounts)

2. Collection StepDefinition of dunning activity, activitypriority, dunning interval, charges &

interest, alternative collection step

3. Organizational ManagementResponsibility determination

4. Capacity Planning &Workload BalancingDefinition of max. no. of dunning

notices in a dunning activity

Dunning Activity Run

 

  As part of the dunning proposal run, the responsible organizational units and/or positions are

determined and based on this information. Workload balancing is carried out. Only afterwards, the

dunning activity run can create the final activities. If you want to carry out workload balancing not

only for collections Workitems but also for other activities, e.g. sending reminder letters, it is

essential that also these activities have a responsible organizational unit (at least a collection center)

assigned.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 501/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-93

SAP AG 2009

Collections Management in the Interaction Center 

Contact a customer as a reminder to pay theoverdue receivables

Powerful features in IC WebClient:

Optimize Interaction Center:Reduce processing time and increase customer satisfaction

Work list entry based on overdue receivables,sorted by priority / ranking

Display of all relevant information for a collector

Possibility of drilling down into further detailswhere needed

Providing all necessary functions for collections process

To Do:

 

  Standard fact sheet provided

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 502/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-94

SAP AG 2009

Dunning in Contract Accounts Receivable andPayable provides flexible dunning that can beadjusted to meet the utility company'srequirements.

Customer payments can be controlled efficiently.The following activities are supported:

Customer letter 

Creation of disconnection orders

Charging fees and/or taxes

There are two techniques for executing dunning:

Classical dunning

Flexible dunning

Dunning: Summary

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 503/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-95

SAP AG 2009

Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable:Installment Plan

Overview

Documents

 Account display

Payments

Returns

Dunning

Installment plan

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 504/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-96

SAP AG 2003

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Add items to an installment plan

Recognize the main functions for processinginstallment plans

Installment Plan: Aims

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 505/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-97

SAP AG 2006

Some customers are not able to keep up with

payments to the utility company

In this situation, installment plans or deferrals can

be arranged for one or more receivables in order

to:

Accommodate the customer 

Guarantee payment

Installment Plan: Introduction

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 506/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-98

SAP AG 2003

Document structure and posting

Display account balance

Payment for account balance

Process returns and post charges

Dunning for the contract account

Installment Plan: Business Scenario

Arrangement o f instal lment p lan 

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 507/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-99

SAP AG 2003

Any number of open items as the basis of an installmentagreement that are kept as original items

Interest calculation for installment plans

Installment plan charges

Letter to the customer 

Change, add and delete individualinstallments

Update installment plan for incomingpayment as well as (partial) clearing oforiginal receivables

Deactivation of installment plans

Installment Plan: Characteristics

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 508/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 509/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-101

SAP AG 2003

Installment Plan: Summary

Simple procedure for creating and managinginstallment plans.

Installment plan categories make it easier to createinstallment plans on the basis of an enterprisemodel.

Either all open items, or any selection of open items,can be included.

Installment plan items are statistical document itemsthat are saved in repetition groups.

 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 510/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-102

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 511/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-103

Exercises

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Manual Document Entry

At the end of these exercises you will be able to:

•  Post a document manually

Understand the kind of information that is contained in a FI-CA document

and know how to access this information

You are an assistant in accounts receivable accounting in your company.

Your colleague has just completed an energy consultation.

You now have to post the corresponding receivableto the business partner’s contract account.

First, save your user profile by choosing

 System→ User Profile→      Own Data

On the Parameters tab page, enter the following parameters:

 Make sure you use uppercase letters! 

If you are attending a course without US scenarios 

BUK: U100  (company code)

FWS:  EUR  (currency key)

8P3: (post without jurisdiction code)

If you are attending a course with US scenarios

BUK: U300  (company code)

FWS: USD  (currency key)

8P3:  X   (post with jurisdiction code)

Make sure you use uppercase letters. 

Your business partners have the following number ranges:

TBCA...  for business partners without US scenarios

TB13...  for business partners with US scenarios.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 512/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 513/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-105

1-1-9 Name three specifications from the document or the document item

that control the determination of account assignment in Financial Accounting.

1. __________________________________________________  

2. __________________________________________________

3. __________________________________________________

Are there any other criteria for determination?

1-2 True or false 

1-2-1 A document is always assigned to just one contract account.

 _____________________________________________________  

1-2-2 Posting documents is the usual method for creating receivables in Contract

Accounts Receivable and Payable.

 _____________________________________________________  

1-2-3 A document contains all the information for posting to Financial Accounting.

 _____________________________________________________  

1-2-4 The document date and posting date always correspond to the entry date.

 _____________________________________________________  

1-2-5 The reconciliation key can differ for each document item.

 _____________________________________________________

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 514/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-106

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 515/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-107

Exercises

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Display Account Balance

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Use the different account balance display options. This means you

can display the items required for analyzing the account using the most

suitable field structure variant

•  Provide information on the balance and development of a contract

account

•  Provide information on the items of a contract account

•  Use the navigation options in the item display

Two customers want to meet with you.

Before you initiate the contact, you would like to obtain a detailed picture

of the recent transactions for each account.

2-1  True or false?

2-1-1 The standard display of the items in a contract account shows all items that have

 been posted to that account. 

 _____________________________________________________  

2-1-2 You can adjust the individual account balance display so that items

other than those in the standard display are

displayed according to user needs.

 _____________________________________________________

2-1-3 The list type determines the line layout (how the lines are

structured) for the item display.

 _____________________________________________________

2-1-4 To display the items in a customer account in another line layout, you have to

return to the initial screen.

 _____________________________________________________  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 516/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-108

2-2 Line item display for a business partner

2-2-1 What is the current balance for your business partner TBCA0110##  

(TB130110## )?

 _____________________________________________________  

2-2-2 Which items make up the balance?

 _____________________________________________________  

 _____________________________________________________  

 _____________________________________________________  

 _____________________________________________________  

 _____________________________________________________  

2-2-3 Have any payments already been made?

 _____________________________________________________

 _____________________________________________________   _____________________________________________________  

 _____________________________________________________  

 _____________________________________________________  

2-3  Navigating the document display (optional)

2-3-1 Identify the receivable from the energy consultation with business partner

TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ).

Tip: Choose the correct line layout variant.

2-3-2 Who posted the receivable?

 _____________________________________________________  

2-3-3 Which reconciliation key was used?

 _____________________________________________________  

2-3-4 Have any taxes been calculated for the energy consultation?

 _____________________________________________________  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 517/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 518/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-110

3-3 Posting a payment lot

3-3-1 Create a payment lot PL-YYMMDD-## .

3-3-2 Enter the search term IUT110-## .

Use the F4 Help to enter a bank clearing account.

3-3-3 Enter payments for two of your business partners:

Amount Business Partner

500 TBCA0210## (TB130210##)

800 TBCA0220## (TB130220##)

3-3-4 Save your entries and close the payment lot.

3-3-5 Post the payments.

3-3-6 Check the status.

3-3-7 Display the postings you have just made in the account display for each business partner and note the effects of the posting.

Tip: Use the Payment List  hotspot.

3-4  Payment at cash desk

3-4-1 Display the open receivables for business partner TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ).

What is the balance?

 _____________________________________________________  

3-4-2 Which items make up the total?

3-4-3 Switch to the cash journal.

Select the subsidiary WDF  for training courses without US scenarios or

 BOS  for training courses with US scenarios.

Branch from here to the cash desk.

3-4-4 Post a payment for the amount of the balance for business partner TBCA0110##  

(TB130110## ). To do this, make the following entries:

Reconcil. Key CD-YYMMDD-##

Business Partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

Amount Balance for TBCA0110##

(TB130110##)

Print a receipt.

Use the printer LOCL.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 519/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-111

Exercises

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Returns

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Post a return

•  Understand the effects of returns on payments that have already

 been made

In accounts receivable accounting, some returns are contained in the bank

statement. You now have to post these.

4-1  Returns lot

4-1-1 Create the returns lot RL-YYMMDD-## .

4-1-2 Enter the search term IUT110-## .

Make sure that Document no. is entered in the Selection Cat. field.

Ensure that the Amounts contain bank charges and Calculate charges 

checkboxes are activated.Switch to New Items.

4-1-3 Enter a return for business partner TBCA0210##  (TB130210## ).

If necessary, open a second session to determine the required payment document

number.

4-1-4 Save the data and close the returns lot.

4-1-5 Post the returns lot.

4-1-6 Check the status.

4-1-7 Switch to the account balance display and take a look at the changes.

4-2  Returns lot with charges (optional)

Repeat the steps of the previous task for the new returns lot  RN-YYMMDD-## . Increase

the return amount by 10.

This time, create a return for the payment made by business partner TBCA0220##  

(TB130220## ) that you entered in exercise 3-3-3. Analyze the charge posting in the

account balance display.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 520/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-112

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 521/541

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 522/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-114

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 523/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-115

Exercises

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Installment Plan

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•  Create an installment plan and describe the range of this function

A business partner calls and wants to make payments in installments. You

create an installment plan.

6-1  Creating an installment plan

6-1-1 Create an installment plan with five installments at intervals of two weeks and a

rounding amount of 10 for all open receivables for business partner

TBCA0130##  (TB130130## ).

6-1-2 Check that the installment plan has been created in the account display.

When you display the contract account from the IC, rememberthat the previous settings for the list type are still active.

However, to display the installment plan, you also need to

display the statistical items.

6-2  Creating an installment plan via CRM

6-2-1 Create an installment plan with twelve installments at monthly intervals for all

open receivables for business partner ISU260A3##.

6-2-2 Verify that the installment plan has been created in the account overview and

that the interaction record reflects the transaction.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 524/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-116

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 525/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-117

Solutions

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Manual Document Entry

1-1  Posting receivables

1-1-1 Specify the menu path that you use to post a document.

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document

 Post  

1-1-2 Post a receivable for today’s energy consultation.

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable →  Document

→ Post  

Use the following data: 

Data Field Content Note

Document Date Today’s date Is preset

Posting Date Today’s date Is preset

Reconciliation Key 01-YYMMDD-

##

YYMMDD = today’s date

1-1-3 Change to the entry screen for document items. For your business partner, enter

a miscellaneous posting for the energy consultation. In doing so, try to make as

few entries as possible, so that you can see which data the system determines

automatically.

1. From the  Post Document: Initial Screen, choose  Enter  

or the OItm  Business partner item list  button.

2. Enter the following values: 

Data Field Content Note

Business Partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##)Main

Transaction

Miscellaneous Postings Use F4 help

Subtransaction Miscellaneous posting Use F4 help

Amount 116

3. Do not save your entries 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 526/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-118

1-1-4 Describe your receivable using the text: Energy consultation of YYMMDD.

To enter text:

-  Choose the line layout ZAP and enter the text in the text field using either

the line layout  icon or F9, 

-  or change to the detail display for your business partner item (for example,

 by double-clicking  on the current item in the list) and enter the text underOther data at the lower end of the entry screen.. 

If you have already saved the document:

1. Choose  Documen→ Change from the menu. 

The document number is preset. 

2. Choose OItm (Business partner item list). 

3. Select line layout ZAP . 

4. Enter the text in the text field.

1-1-5 Post the document and make a note of the document number.

1. To post the document, choose  Post . 

2. The document number is displayed in the message bar after posting.

1-1-6 Display the document.

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Document

→ Display 

1-1-7 Display the document item.

From the Display Document: Initial Screen, choose OItm to display the

document items.

Another possible solution: 

From the Display Document: Initial Screen, choose  Enter .

Then double-click  on the summary of business partner items,

or select the item with the cursor and choose

 Edit → Choose (F2) from the menu to display the business partner item.

1-1-8 What is the general ledger data?

Data Field Value Source

Company Code U100 (U300) Entry for Post Document  G/L Account 140520 Account Determination

Account

Determination ID

01 Contract Account

Double click on the business partner item.

On the Basic Data tab page you can see the company code and the G/L account.

The account determination ID is on the Add. Data tab page.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 527/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-119

1-1-9 Name three specifications from the document or the document item that control

the determination of account assignment in Financial Accounting.

1. Company code in the document item

2. Main transaction in the document item

3. Subtransaction in the document item

Other criteria include the account determination ID and the division.

1-2 True or false? 

1-2-1 A document is always assigned to just one contract account.

False.

A document can have more than one document item,

each of which can be assigned to a different contract account.

1-2-2 Posting documents is the usual method for creating receivables in Contract Accounts

Receivable and Payable.

False.

The usual method of creating receivables is by invoicing.

1-2-3 A document contains all the information for posting to Financial Accounting.

True.

Whilst it is possible to group documents using the reconciliation key,

each individual document contains information for posting and offsetting in

Financial Accounting.

1-2-4 The document date and posting date always correspond to the entry date.

False.

These three dates may be different.

1-2-5 The reconciliation key can differ for each document item.

False.

There is only one reconciliation key for each document.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 528/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-120

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 529/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-121

Solutions

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Display Account Balance

2-1  True or false?

2-1-1 The standard display of the items in a customer account shows all items that

were posted to that account.

False.

The standard display shows all open non-statistical  items. 

2-1-2 The line item display can be modified to display items other than those pre-configured in the standard settings by default.

True.

You define your own line item display by choosing

 Settings→  Display / Change or F6  or the corresponding icon.

2-1-3 The list type determines the line layout of the item display.

False.

The list type determines which items are displayed.

2-1-4 To display the items in a contract account in a different line layout, you must

return to the initial screen.

False.

You can change the line layout in the item display using the Select Line Layout

 button or by choosing Settings→      Line Layout  or Settings→ Display/Change.

You can then save the line layout in the user parameters.

If a totals variant is active, you can double-click an item to display a more

detailed line layout variant. Alternatively, you can use the blue arrows in the

variant display (provided you have activated them in your personal settings for

account balance display).

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 530/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-122

2-2  Line item display for a business partner

2-2-1 What is the balance for business partner TBCA0110##  (TB130110## )?

1.  Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → 

 Account → Account Balance 

2. Enter TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ) in the Business Partner  field.

The value in the  List Type field is preset with Standard - All open items.The  Line Layout  field shows Standard line layout – acc. display. 

3. Choose Return. 

4. Choose the Totals hotspot. 

5. The balance appears in the Total  field. 

2-2-2 Which items make up the balance?

Double-click on the Receivablesor the Total  line to return to the display of the

receivables that are still open.

Alternatively, choose the Receivables hotspot directly. 2-2-3 Have any payments already been made?

1. Go Back (F3) to Account Display: Initial Screen. 

2. Choose either a list type that shows not only open items

(using the F4 Help, for example, the list type All Items),

or choose the Detail  button on the List Type subscreen. 

Select the Cleared Items field and choose  Enter . 

3. Return to the account display. This displays all payments made that can be

analyzed using the Payment List  hotspot.

2-3  Navigating the document display (optional)

2-3-1 Identify the receivable from the energy consultation with business partner

TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ).

Choose the correct line layout variant.

1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account

→ Account Balance 

2. Enter TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ) in the  Business Partner  field. 

3. Choose Enter . 4. Choose  Line layout (Shift+F4). 

5. Select the line layout variant  Account display with document text

(IUT110). 

6. You can now see which open receivable is for the energy consultation,

if you entered the text Energy consultation ... in the exercise.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 531/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-123

2-3-2 Who posted the receivable?

1. Double-click on the document.

You are now in the Display Document: Item screen.

2. Choose  Document Header . 

3. You can read the user key of the person who created the document

from the Created by field. 

2-3-3 Which reconciliation key was used?

Contained in the Reconcil. key field in the document header. 

2-3-4 Have any taxes been calculated for the energy consultation?

Choose the Overview button or select

Goto → Overview from the menu.

You can see the tax items in detail here by choosing the  Taxes button.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 532/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-124

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 533/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-125

Solutions

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Payment

3-1  Payment lot

Which steps must be carried out when processing a payment lot?

1. Create

2. Close

3. Post 

3-2  True or false?

3-2-1 If you are interrupted while working on a payment lot, you can resume work on

it at any time, provided that you do not close it.

True.

The Change step exists for this purpose. 

3-2-2 Once the payment lot is closed, no more changes can be made to it.

False.

While it is true that no new items can be added and items cannot be deleted,existing items can be corrected.

3-2-3 The procedures for payment lots and check lots are identical.

True.

The only difference is that a different screen variant must be chosen for the line

layout, since a check number must be entered for a check. This does not occur in

the screen variant for the payment lot, however.

3-3  Posting a payment lot

3-3-1 Create the payment lot PL-YYMMDD-## .

1.  Utilities Industry Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

 Payments Payment Lot  

2. Enter   PL-YYMMDD-## in the  Lot  field. 

3. Choose Create (F5). 

3-3-2 Enter the search term IUT110-## .

Use the F4 Help to specify a bank clearing account.

If the value date is not set by default, enter today's date.  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 534/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-126

3-3-3 Enter payments for two of your business partners:

To enter the items, chose the New Items pushbutton. 

Amount Business Partner

500 TBCA0210## (TB130210##)

800 TBCA0220## (TB130220##)

The business partner number has to be defined in the Selection value field in

selection category G .

3-3-4 Save your entries and close the payment lot.

1. Choose  Save. 

2. Choose  Back F3.

You now see the Payment Lot Create: Default Entries and Status screen. 

3. Choose  Back F3 again.You have returned to the  Payment Lot: Initial Screen.

Observe the change in status during the following activities.

4. Choose Close and confirm the action. 

3-3-5 Post the payments.

1. Choose Post .

2. Choose  Start Directly.

3. Choose Enter. 

3-3-6 Check the status.

The status should read Postings made.

3-3-7 Display the postings in the account display for the business partners and note the

effects of the postings.

Use the knowledge you have acquired in the unit Display Account Balance. Tip:

Use the Payment List  hotspot. 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 535/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-127

3-4 Payment at cash desk  

3-4-1 Display the open receivables for business partner TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ).

What is the balance?

1.  Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → 

 Account → Account Balance 

2. Enter the number of your business partner TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ) inthe  Business Partner  field. 

3. Choose Enter . 

4. Choose the Totals hotspot.

You can see the balance for the open items in the Total  field. 

3-4-2 Which items make up the total?

1. Double-click on the Receivables field in the totals display. This takes you

to the individual receivables display.

2. Ensure that you have chosen the line layout variant Account display withdocument text (IUT110) to display the document text column. 

Amount Item Type

116,00 Miscellaneous posting: Energy consultation from

<dd.mm.yy> (from the Post Document exercise)

3-4-3 Switch to the cash journal. Select the subsidiary WDF  for training courses

without US scenarios or BOS  for training courses with US scenarios. Branch

from here to the cash desk:

Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Payments

→ Cash Journal →                       Cash Journal → To Cash Desk  

3-4-4 Post a payment for the amount of the open balance of business partner

TBCA0110##  (TB130110## ).

Reconcil. Key CD-YYMMDD-## (Under Further posting specs) 

Business Partner TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

Amount Balance of TBCA0110## (TB130110##)

1. Ensure that the Inc.Cash Pymt  checkbox is selected.

2. To post the payment, choose Post  or Post Online. If you have chosen the 

 Post Online  button, choose Save to make the posting. 

3. Select Print Receipt  and confirm the print parameters.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 536/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-128

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 537/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-129

Solutions

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Returns

4-1  Returns lot

4-1-1 Create a returns lot (RL-yymmdd-##).

1. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → 

 Payments → Returns → Returns Lot  

2. Enter   RL-yymmdd-##  in the  Returns Lot  field.

3.  Choose Create (F5). 

4-1-2 Enter the search term (IUT110-##). Make sure that Document no. is entered in

the Selection Cat. field. Ensure that the Amounts contain bank charges and

Calculate charges checkboxes are activated. Switch to New Items.

1. Search term:  IUT110-## 

2. Make the settings listed above and save them using Save (CTRL+S), if

these have not already bee preset.

3. Choose New Items. 

4-1-3 Enter a return for business partner TBCA0210## (TB130210##).If necessary, open a second session to determine the required payment

document number.

1.  System → Create Session 

2. Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → 

 Account → Account Balance 

3. Enter the number of your business partner  TBCA0210## (TB130210##) 

in the  Business Partner  field. 

4. Choose the standard list type All items and line layout Account display

with document text (IUT110). 

5. Choose the green checkmark (ENTER). 

6. Note or copy the payment document number.

7. Close the second session: System End Session 

8. In the Returns: Record/Process Items screen, enter the payment

document number in the SelectionValue field and enter the return

reason 01 Bank Account Overdraft . The Selection Cat. should be set to

 B. 

9. Choose Enter . The amount is determined automatically. 

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 538/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-130

4-1-4 Save the data and close the returns lot.

1. Choose Save (CTRL+S). 

2. Choose Back (F3). You now see the Returns: Specifications and Status:

 Edit  screen. 

3. Choose Back (F3). You are now in the Returns: Request Screen. 

4. Choose Close and confirm the action. 

4-1-5 Post the returns lot.

1. To do this, choose Post . 

2. Choose Start Online. 

3. Choose OK . 

4-1-6 Check the status.

The status should read Postings made. 

4-1-7 Switch to the account balance display and take a look at the changes.Use the Payment List  hotspot here too.

4-2  Returns lot with charges (optional)

Repeat the steps in the previous task for a new returns lot (RN-yymmdd-##). Increase

the return amount by 10.

This time, generate a return for the payment entered for business partner TBCA0220##

(TB130220##) in exercise 3-3-3.

The solution is the same as for 4-1. In the account display, you will notice that the bankcharges contained in the return amount were posted together as one item with the utility

company’s charges.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 539/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-131

Solutions

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Dunning

5-1  True or false?

5-1-1 The dunning process is carried out using the same procedure for all the

company’s contract accounts.

False. The dunning procedure can be defined in the contract account and can

even be applied to individual line items.

5-1-2 The days in arrears and the dunning frequency largely determine when a dueopen item can be dunned.

True. The days in arrears determine the minimum number of days that must

have passed since the due date before dunning can occur. The dunning

frequency defines the number of days that must have passed since the issue date

of the dunning letter before another dunning letter can be sent.

5-2  Dunning history

Take a look at the dunning history for business partner TBCA0220## (TB130220##).

1.  Utilities Industry → Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable → Account → 

Further Information → Dunning History 

2. Enter TBCA0220## (TB130220##) in the Business Partner  field. 

3. Choose Execute (F8). 

4. The dunning history is displayed.

5-3  Dunning history in CRM

1.  Identify business partner Walter Dunning, ISUUS02074.

2.  In the navigation toolbar, click on Collections > Dunning History.

3.  View the dunning notice which has been issued.

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 540/541

 

(©) SAP AG IUT110 13-132

Solutions

Unit: Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable

Topic: Installment Plan

6-1  Creating an installment plan

6-1-1 Create an installment plan with five installments at intervals of two weeks and a

rounding amount of 10 for all open receivables for business partner

TBCA0130## (TB130130##).

1.  Utilities Industry Customer Service Front Office/Customer

 Interaction Center Customer Interaction Center  2. Enter TBCA0130## (TB130130##) in the Part. field (in the search

criteria). Choose Enter  to display the business partner’s data. Then choose

Confirm Partner  with the green checkmark on the right of the data finder.

3. The business partner environment is displayed in the navigation area.

Select the contract account. Then click the right mouse button and choose

Create Installment Plan. 

4. Click the Select All (Shift+F7) button to choose all open items. 

5. Enter <today's date> in the  Start Date field. Then enter the required data

in the No. of Instmnts, Inst. Interval ,  Interval Type and   Rounding

 Amount  fields.Choose  Installment Plan or ENTER. 

6. Check the number of installments and the installment intervals and select

 Save or Ctrl+S . 

7. Enter a text for the contact and save it by choosing Save or Ctrl+S . 

6-1-2 Check that the installment plan has been created in the account display.

When you display the customer account from the IC, remember

that the previous settings for the list type are still active.

However, to display the installment plan, you also need to

display the statistical items.

Click the right mouse button on the contract account to choose the customer

account . If no items are selected, the statistical items display is not activated

under list type. You can choose another list type on the initial screen for the

account balance display.

6-2  Creating an installment plan in CRM

6-2-1 Create an installment plan with twelve installments at monthly intervals for all

open receivables for business partner Max Mayer, ISU260A3##.

1.   Log into CRM Interaction Center  

8/19/2019 Introduction to Utilities - SAP IS-U CCS

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/introduction-to-utilities-sap-is-u-ccs 541/541

 

2. Enter ISU260A3## in the Account ID field. Press Enter  to process the

search criteria and display the business partner’s data. Confirm the

account and service location if required.

3. Along the navigation bar, click on Account Balance to display the

Account Overview. In the topmost view, click on Installment Plan.

4. Verify that no current installment plans exist for the account. Click on

 New to pull up the Create New Plan view. 

5. Click the Select All  button to choose all open items.

6. Choose a plan type based on the requirements – 12 months, no fee. 

7. Enter <today's date> in the  Start Date field. Then verify the Print

 Parameter  setting. 

8. Click the Save and Back  button to save the plan and return to the Account

Overview